Zollege is here for to help you!!
Need Counselling
Simran Zutshi's profile photo

Simran Zutshi

Content Strategist|Tech-innovator|National Hackathon Winner | Updated On - Apr 2, 2026

MHT CET Question Papers are the most important study material for effective exam preparation. We at Zollege have provided all MHT CET Previous Year Papers with Solution PDFs here. MHT CET 2024 PCB exam was conducted successfully on April 22 by State CET Cell.

Students can freely download the MHT CET previous year's question paper PDFs along with their solutions here. We strongly encourage MHT CET aspirants to scan through all the MHT CET Question Paper to know the overall difficulty level, MHT CET Syllabus and understand the changes in MHT CET Exam Pattern over the years.

MHT CET 2024 PCB Question Paper Pdf- Check Solutions with Solution Pdf

MHT CET 2024 PCB Question Paper with Solution PDF Download Pdf Check Solution

Biology

Question 1:

In eukaryotic organisms, replication of DNA occurs in _______________

  • (A) anaphase
  • (B) \(G_1\) phase
  • (C) \(G_2\) phase
  • (D) S phase
Correct Answer: (D) S phase
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The eukaryotic cell cycle is divided into two main phases: Interphase (preparation for division) and M phase (actual division). Interphase is further subdivided into \(G_1\), S, and \(G_2\) phases.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific sub-phase of interphase dedicated to the synthesis and duplication of genetic material.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- anaphase: A stage of mitosis (M phase) where sister chromatids are pulled apart to opposite poles.

- \(G_1\) phase: The first gap phase where the cell undergoes major growth and normal metabolic functions, but DNA is not yet replicated.

- \(G_2\) phase: The second gap phase where the cell prepares for mitosis by synthesizing necessary proteins and organelles.

- S phase: The Synthesis phase. This is when the actual replication of DNA occurs, doubling the amount of DNA in the cell to ensure each daughter cell receives a complete set.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, the replication of DNA occurs specifically in the S phase.
Quick Tip: Remember the cell cycle sequence using \textbf{GSGM}: \textbf{G}1 (Growth), \textbf{S} (Synthesis/DNA replication), \textbf{G}2 (Growth \& prep), \textbf{M} (Mitosis). The amount of DNA doubles in S phase (2C to 4C), but chromosome number remains the same (2n).


Question 2:

Capillarity theory was proposed by _______________

  • (A) Bohem
  • (B) J. Priestley
  • (C) Dixon and Joly
  • (D) Levitt
Correct Answer: (A) Bohem
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Historically, several physical force theories have been proposed to explain the ascent of sap (upward movement of water) in tall plants.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Match the specific physiological theory of water transport with the scientist who originally proposed it.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Bohem (Boehm): Proposed the Capillarity theory in 1809. He suggested that water rises in the narrow lumen of xylem vessels strictly due to capillary action (the forces of adhesion and cohesion).

- J. Priestley: Famous for his bell jar experiments demonstrating that plants release oxygen and restore air quality, not for theories on ascent of sap.

- Dixon and Joly: Proposed the most widely accepted theory today, the Cohesion-Tension theory (or Transpiration Pull theory) in 1894.

- Levitt: Proposed the active \(K^+\) transport mechanism explaining the opening and closing of stomata.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Thus, the Capillarity theory was proposed by Bohem.
Quick Tip: Important pairings to memorize for plant physiology:
- \textbf{Capillarity Theory:} Boehm (Bohem)
- \textbf{Cohesion-Tension Theory:} Dixon and Joly
- \textbf{Root Pressure Theory:} Priestley
- \textbf{Active Potassium Transport:} Levitt


Question 3:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - Oxaloacetate is useful as a precursor for synthesis of aspartic acid.

Statement II - \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate is useful for synthesis of glutamic acid.

In light of above statements, select the correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Intermediate compounds of the Krebs cycle (like keto acids) serve as vital carbon skeletons for the biosynthesis of non-essential amino acids in living organisms.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the biochemical transamination reactions to confirm if the given \(\alpha\)-keto acids correspond to their respective amino acid products.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I: Oxaloacetate is a 4-carbon \(\alpha\)-keto acid. During transamination, an amino group is transferred to oxaloacetate, converting it directly into the 4-carbon amino acid aspartic acid (aspartate). Thus, Statement I is a biological fact.

- Statement II: \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate is a 5-carbon \(\alpha\)-keto acid. Through reductive amination or transamination, it accepts an amino group and is converted into the 5-carbon amino acid glutamic acid (glutamate). Thus, Statement II is also a biological fact.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Since both biochemical relationships described are accurate, both statements are correct.
Quick Tip: Memorize these critical transamination pairs:
1. \textbf{Oxaloacetate} \(\rightleftharpoons\) \textbf{Aspartic Acid}
2. \textbf{\(\alpha\)-Ketoglutarate} \(\rightleftharpoons\) \textbf{Glutamic Acid}
3. \textbf{Pyruvate} \(\rightleftharpoons\) \textbf{Alanine}


Question 4:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - Defecation is an involuntary process that takes place through anal opening guarded by sphincter muscles.

Statement II - Distension, of rectum stimulates pressure sensitive receptors that initiate a neural reflex for egestion.

In light of above statements, select the correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Defecation is the physiological process of eliminating solid waste from the digestive tract, involving both neural reflexes and muscular control.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Analyze whether the entire process is strictly involuntary or involves voluntary control, and verify the trigger mechanism for the defecation reflex.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I: This statement claims defecation is entirely an involuntary process. This is false. While the internal anal sphincter is involuntary (smooth muscle), the external anal sphincter is composed of skeletal muscle and is under voluntary control. Therefore, the act of defecation itself can be voluntarily controlled and delayed in humans.

- Statement II: When fecal matter enters the rectum, it stretches the rectal walls. This distension stimulates pressure-sensitive stretch receptors, which send signals to the central nervous system to initiate the defecation reflex (an involuntary urge to egest). This statement is anatomically and physiologically correct.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, Statement I is incorrect, but Statement II is correct.
Quick Tip: To avoid confusion: The \textbf{urge} to defecate is an involuntary reflex caused by rectal distension. However, the \textbf{act} of defecation is voluntary due to the skeletal muscle of the external anal sphincter.


Question 5:

Angina pectoris is severe pain and heaviness in chest that is mainly caused due to

  • (A) metabolic disorder of pancreas
  • (B) deficiency of iodine in diet
  • (C) reduction in blood supply to cardiac muscles due to atherosclerosis
  • (D) long term exposure to dust particles as in silicosis
Correct Answer: (C) reduction in blood supply to cardiac muscles due to atherosclerosis
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Angina pectoris is a cardiovascular disorder characterized by acute chest pain, serving as a warning sign for heart disease.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Relate the clinical symptom (chest pain) to its underlying physiological cause in the cardiovascular system.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- (A) Metabolic disorder of pancreas: Relates to conditions like diabetes mellitus, which does not directly cause acute chest pain.

- (B) Deficiency of iodine: Leads to thyroid disorders such as goiter, unrelated to chest pain.

- (C) Reduction in blood supply due to atherosclerosis: Atherosclerosis involves the buildup of fatty plaques inside coronary arteries. This narrows the arteries, restricting blood flow and reducing the oxygen supply to the heart muscle (myocardial ischemia). This acute shortage of oxygen directly causes the severe chest pain known as angina pectoris.

- (D) Long term exposure to dust: Causes occupational respiratory disorders like silicosis, affecting the lungs rather than the heart's blood supply.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The primary cause is the reduction in blood supply to cardiac muscles.
Quick Tip: Differentiate the cardiac conditions:
- \textbf{Angina:} Chest pain from inadequate oxygen (reversible).
- \textbf{Myocardial Infarction (Heart Attack):} Death of heart tissue due to prolonged blood blockage (irreversible).
- \textbf{Heart Failure:} Heart's pumping ability is too weak to meet the body's demands.


Question 6:

The term 'Niche' denotes the _______________ role played by an organism in its environment.

  • (A) chemical
  • (B) functional
  • (C) biological
  • (D) physical
Correct Answer: (B) functional
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In ecology, an organism's position in its ecosystem is defined by both its physical location and its ecological function.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall the standard ecological definition of a "niche" and distinguish it from "habitat."

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- A habitat is the physical space or address where an organism lives (its physical environment).

- An ecological niche is a much broader concept. It encompasses everything an organism does to survive and reproduce. It includes its interactions with the biotic and abiotic factors, what it eats, its behavior, and how it contributes to the energy flow of the ecosystem.

- Therefore, the single best word to summarize this comprehensive suite of activities and interactions is the organism's functional role.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The term 'Niche' denotes the functional role played by the organism.
Quick Tip: A classic ecological analogy: An organism's \textbf{habitat} is its "address" (where it can be found), while its \textbf{niche} is its "profession" (what it does for a living within that community).


Question 7:

When the phage DNA enters the host bacterium, the host cell protects itself from the viral DNA attacks with the help of _______________ enzyme.

  • (A) exonuclease
  • (B) restriction endonuclease
  • (C) DNA ligase
  • (D) helicase
Correct Answer: (B) restriction endonuclease
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Bacteria face constant threats from bacteriophages (viruses). They have evolved immune-like defense mechanisms to survive these infections.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific class of enzymes bacteria use to degrade invading foreign DNA.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- exonuclease: Cleaves nucleotides one at a time from the ends of a polynucleotide chain. Not the primary specific defense against phages.

- DNA ligase: An enzyme that joins DNA strands together by forming phosphodiester bonds.

- helicase: Unwinds the DNA double helix during replication.

- restriction endonuclease: These enzymes act as molecular scissors. They scan the invading phage DNA, recognize specific short nucleotide sequences, and make cuts \textit{inside the DNA molecule, effectively dismantling the viral genome before it can hijack the cell. (The bacteria protect their own DNA by modifying it, usually via methylation).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The protective enzyme is restriction endonuclease.
Quick Tip: Restriction endonucleases "restrict" the growth of bacteriophages in bacteria. Because of their ability to cut DNA at highly specific sequences, they became the foundational tools for genetic engineering and recombinant DNA technology.


Question 8:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - Nervous tissue is without lymphatic vessels.

Statement II - Nervous tissue is endodermal in origin.

In light of above statements, choose the most appropriate correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Nervous tissue has specific developmental origins and anatomical features that distinguish it from other fundamental tissues.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Verify the embryonic germ layer origin of the nervous system and recall the classical anatomical characteristics regarding its vascularization.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I: Classically, the central nervous system (brain and spinal cord) is taught to lack a traditional lymphatic drainage system. Instead, the cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) acts functionally similar to lymph, draining waste products. (Though recent modern discoveries show some meningeal lymphatics, in standard curricula, it is accepted as "without lymphatic vessels"). Thus, Statement I is treated as correct.

- Statement II: During embryogenesis, the three germ layers (ectoderm, mesoderm, endoderm) form all tissues. The entire nervous system originates specifically from the ectoderm (via the neural tube and neural crest). It is not endodermal. Thus, Statement II is incorrect.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement I is correct and Statement II is incorrect.
Quick Tip: Embryonic Origins to memorize:
- \textbf{Ectoderm:} Nervous tissue, Epidermis of skin.
- \textbf{Mesoderm:} Muscular tissue, Connective tissue (bone, blood), Kidneys.
- \textbf{Endoderm:} Epithelial lining of digestive and respiratory tracts.


Question 9:

With reference to adolescence, what is mhGAP?

  • (A) A programme by Maharashtra State Government to improve mental health.
  • (B) A programme by WHO to improve reproductive health.
  • (C) A programme by WHO for the treatment of mental disorder.
  • (D) A programme by Maharashtra State Government for the treatment of physical disorder.
Correct Answer: (C) A programme by WHO for the treatment of mental disorder.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Public health initiatives are often abbreviated. mhGAP is a prominent global health action plan.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the full form of the acronym "mhGAP" and the international organization responsible for it.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- The acronym mhGAP stands for the Mental Health Gap Action Programme.

- It is a global program launched by the World Health Organization (WHO) in 2008.

- The primary goal of mhGAP is to scale up services for mental, neurological, and substance use disorders for countries, especially those with low and middle incomes, addressing the "gap" in treatment. It is highly relevant to adolescence, a vulnerable period for the onset of mental disorders.

- It is an international WHO initiative, not a state-level program (like Maharashtra).

Step 4: Final Answer:

It is a program by WHO for the treatment of mental disorders.
Quick Tip: In global health terminology, "mh" almost universally stands for "mental health". Recognizing this immediately eliminates options relating to reproductive or physical disorders.


Question 10:

Damage to biodiversity takes place due to natural reasons which includes the following EXCEPT

  • (A) Volcanic eruption
  • (B) Forest fires
  • (C) Reclamation
  • (D) Earthquakes Earthquakes
Correct Answer: (C) Reclamation
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Biodiversity loss is driven by a combination of natural disasters and human-induced (anthropogenic) activities.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Categorize each option as either a "natural event" or a "human activity" to find the exception.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- (A) Volcanic eruption: A naturally occurring geological event that can devastate local habitats.

- (B) Forest fires: While humans cause many, they also occur naturally (e.g., via lightning) and act as a natural disturbance.

- (D) Earthquakes: A naturally occurring seismic event causing physical destruction of habitats.

- (C) Reclamation: Land reclamation is the process of creating new land from oceans, riverbeds, or lake beds. This is exclusively an anthropogenic (human-made) activity designed to create space for agriculture or urbanization. It severely damages natural aquatic and coastal ecosystems.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Reclamation is not a natural reason; hence it is the exception.
Quick Tip: When a question asks for "natural reasons EXCEPT," look for the option that represents human intervention or industrialization. Reclamation inherently implies human engineering of land.


Question 11:

Match the disorder in column I with their nature in column II.

  • (A) i-a ii - c iii - d iv - b
  • (B) i \(-\) b ii -a iii -c iv -d
  • (C) i-d ii - c iii - a iv - b
  • (D) i - d ii - a iii - b iv - c
Correct Answer: (D) i - d ii - a iii - b iv - c
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Genetic disorders are broadly classified into Mendelian disorders (alteration in a single gene) and Chromosomal disorders (absence, excess, or abnormal arrangement of one or more chromosomes).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Match each specific syndrome to its chromosomal karyotype or genetic classification.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- i. Thalassemia: Caused by a mutation in the genes coding for hemoglobin chains. It is inherited in an autosomal recessive manner, making it a classic Mendelian disorder (d).

- ii. Turner's syndrome: Occurs in females who lack one of their X chromosomes (karyotype 45, XO). This condition is an X monosomy (a).

- iii. Klinefelter's syndrome: Occurs in males who possess an extra X chromosome (karyotype 47, XXY). Thus, it represents an Extra X chromosome in male (b).

- iv. Down's syndrome: Caused by the presence of an extra copy of chromosome 21. It is technically known as \(21^{st}\) Trisomy (c).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct matches are i-d, ii-a, iii-b, iv-c.
Quick Tip: To quickly sort disorders: If it's named after a mutation in a specific protein (like hemoglobin, coagulation factor), it's usually Mendelian. If it involves a whole missing or extra chromosome (Trisomy/Monosomy), it's a chromosomal disorder.


Question 12:

Chemical digestion of which one of the following starts first in human alimentary canal?

  • (A) Proteins
  • (B) Starch
  • (C) Lipids and fats
  • (D) Cellulose
Correct Answer: (B) Starch
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Digestion is both a mechanical and chemical process. Different biomacromolecules encounter their specific digestive enzymes at different stages of the alimentary canal.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Trace the path of food through the digestive system and identify the first active chemical enzyme encountered.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Digestion begins in the oral cavity (mouth).

- Saliva, secreted into the mouth, contains the enzyme salivary amylase (also known as ptyalin).

- Salivary amylase acts specifically on carbohydrates. It begins the chemical hydrolysis of starch into the disaccharide maltose. Approximately 30% of starch is digested here.

- Proteins: Chemical digestion begins later in the stomach via the enzyme pepsin.

- Lipids: Significant chemical digestion begins in the small intestine via pancreatic lipases (after bile emulsification).

- Cellulose: Humans do not produce cellulase, so cellulose remains chemically undigested and forms roughage.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, the chemical digestion of starch starts first.
Quick Tip: Sequence of chemical digestion initiation:
1. \textbf{Carbohydrates (Starch):} Starts in Mouth (Salivary amylase).
2. \textbf{Proteins:} Starts in Stomach (Pepsin).
3. \textbf{Fats:} Primarily starts in Small Intestine (Pancreatic lipase).


Question 13:

DDT resistant mosquitoes and different beak sizes of African seed cracker finches show _______________ type of selection respectively.

  • (A) stabilizing and directional
  • (B) disruptive and balancing
  • (C) directional and disruptive
  • (D) balancing and directional
Correct Answer: (C) directional and disruptive
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Natural selection can act on a population's phenotypic distribution in three primary ways: stabilizing, directional, or disruptive.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Analyze how the environmental pressure shifts the population curve in each specific example.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- DDT resistant mosquitoes: The introduction of the pesticide DDT killed the majority of susceptible mosquitoes. The few that possessed a resistance gene survived and reproduced. Over generations, the entire population shifted towards the resistant phenotype. Because selection favored one extreme phenotype over the other, this is directional selection.

- African seed cracker finches: In their habitat, available food consists mainly of very hard seeds or very soft seeds, with few intermediate types. Birds with large beaks survive by cracking hard seeds; birds with small beaks survive on soft seeds. Birds with intermediate beaks perform poorly on both and face higher mortality. Because selection favors both extreme phenotypes and acts against the average, this is disruptive selection.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The types of selection are directional and disruptive, respectively.
Quick Tip: Visualizing Selection Curves:
- \textbf{Directional:} The whole bell curve shifts to the left or right.
- \textbf{Disruptive:} The center of the bell curve dips, creating two separate peaks (like a camel's back).
- \textbf{Stabilizing:} The bell curve becomes narrower and taller in the middle.


Question 14:

The number of ATP molecules generated in aerobic respiration after oxidation of two molecules of pyruvic acid is.

  • (A) 6
  • (B) 12
  • (C) 24
  • (D) 30
Correct Answer: (D) 30
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In aerobic respiration, pyruvic acid (formed after glycolysis) enters the mitochondria, undergoes the link reaction to form Acetyl CoA, and then enters the Krebs cycle for complete oxidation.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Calculate the ATP equivalent yielded from the oxidation of one pyruvic acid molecule, then multiply the result by two. (Standard conversion: 1 NADH = 3 ATP, 1 FADH\(_2\) = 2 ATP).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For ONE molecule of Pyruvic acid:

1. Link Reaction: Pyruvic acid \(\rightarrow\) Acetyl CoA.

Yields 1 NADH. (\(1 \times 3 = \textbf{3 ATP\)).

2. Krebs Cycle: Acetyl CoA completes one turn of the cycle.

Yields 3 NADH (\(3 \times 3 = \textbf{9 ATP}\)).

Yields 1 FADH\(_2\) (\(1 \times 2 = \textbf{2 ATP}\)).

Yields 1 GTP via substrate-level phosphorylation (\(1 \times 1 = \textbf{1 ATP}\)).

Total from Krebs = \(9 + 2 + 1 = \textbf{12 ATP}\).

Total ATP from ONE Pyruvic acid = 3 (Link) + 12 (Krebs) = 15 ATP.

For TWO molecules of Pyruvic acid = \(15 \times 2 = \textbf{30 ATP}\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The total ATP generated is 30.
Quick Tip: Memorize these energy totals based on the standard traditional model (38 ATP max):
- Oxidation of 1 Acetyl CoA = 12 ATP
- Oxidation of 1 Pyruvic acid = 15 ATP
- Oxidation of 1 Glucose = 38 (or 36) ATP


Question 15:

During oogenesis the meiotic division is arrested at________ before fertilization.

  • (A) Anaphase I
  • (B) Metaphase I
  • (C) Anaphase II
  • (D) Metaphase II
Correct Answer: (D) Metaphase II
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Oogenesis, the formation of female gametes, is a discontinuous process characterized by two distinct phases of meiotic arrest.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Trace the timeline of an oocyte from fetal development to ovulation and identify the specific stage at which it halts prior to the entry of a sperm.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- First Arrest: Primary oocytes begin Meiosis I during fetal development but are arrested in Prophase I (diplotene stage). They remain in this state until puberty.

- Resumption: After puberty, during each menstrual cycle, a primary oocyte completes Meiosis I to form a secondary oocyte and a first polar body.

- Second Arrest: The newly formed secondary oocyte immediately begins Meiosis II, but it halts at Metaphase II.

- It is in this Metaphase II arrested state that the oocyte is ovulated (released from the ovary).

- Meiosis II is only completed if and when a sperm penetrates the oocyte (fertilization).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The division is arrested at Metaphase II before fertilization.
Quick Tip: To remember the sequence:
- Childhood to Puberty = Waiting in \textbf{Prophase I}.
- Ovulation to Fertilization = Waiting in \textbf{Metaphase II}.


Question 16:

Accessory cells of stomata are reservoirs of________.

  • (A) \(Zn^{++}\)ions
  • (B) \(H^{+}\)ions
  • (C) \(K^{+}\)ions
  • (D) \(H^{+}\)ions and \(Cl^{-}\)ions
Correct Answer: (C) \(\text{K}^{+}\)ions
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Stomatal pores open and close based on the changes in turgor pressure of the guard cells that flank them.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall Levitt's Active Potassium Transport Theory, which explains the osmotic mechanisms controlling guard cell turgidity.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- According to the \(K^+\) transport theory, during the day, potassium ions (\(K^{+}\)) are actively pumped from the surrounding accessory cells (subsidiary cells) into the guard cells.

- This influx of \(K^{+}\) lowers the osmotic potential inside the guard cells, causing water to flow in (endosmosis). The guard cells become turgid and bow outwards, opening the stoma.

- During the night, the \(K^{+}\) ions are transported back out of the guard cells to close the pore.

- Therefore, the accessory cells surrounding the guard cells act as temporary holding areas or reservoirs for these crucial \(K^{+}\) ions.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Accessory cells act as reservoirs for \(K^{+}\) ions.
Quick Tip: Potassium (\(K^+\)) is the master regulator of stomatal movement. Water follows the potassium. If \(K^+\) goes into the guard cell, water follows (opens). If \(K^+\) leaves, water follows (closes).


Question 17:

Mature erythrocytes are enucleated in following animals EXCEPT

i. Rat

ii. Monkey

iii. Llama

iv. Camel

v. Elephant

Choose the correct answer from options given below.

  • (A) i and ii only
  • (B) iii, iv and v only
  • (C) iii and iv only
  • (D) v only
Correct Answer: (C) iii and iv only
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Erythrocytes (Red Blood Cells) in mammals have a unique structural adaptation. To maximize the space available for hemoglobin and oxygen transport, they lose their nucleus and most organelles during maturation.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the taxonomic family within the mammalian class that violates the general rule of having circular, enucleated RBCs.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Almost all mammals (including rats, monkeys, and elephants) possess typical enucleated, biconcave red blood cells.

- However, the family Camelidae presents a classic textbook exception.

- Members of this family, specifically the Camel (iv) and the Llama (iii), possess mature erythrocytes that are elliptical/oval in shape. In classical comparative biology curricula, they are often highlighted as the exception because they were historically described as being nucleated (or having RBCs that distinctly differ from the standard mammalian enucleated model, though technically mature camelid RBCs do eventually lose their nucleus, their unique oval structure makes them the designated exception in this context).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The exceptions are the Llama and the Camel (iii and iv).
Quick Tip: This is a classic trivia question in biology: \textbf{Camel and Llama} are the standard exceptions taught for mammalian RBC structure. While other mammals have circular/biconcave RBCs, theirs are oval/elliptical.


Question 18:

Agarose gel electrophoresis is used to separate DNA fragments. The DNA fragments separate due to _______________ .

  • (A) difference in their staining property
  • (B) difference in the base sequence in them
  • (C) positive charge on the fragments
  • (D) difference in the size of fragments
Correct Answer: (D) difference in the size of fragments
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Gel electrophoresis is a core molecular biology technique used to sort and separate macromolecules like DNA, RNA, or proteins based on their physical properties.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Determine what physical property of DNA causes fragments to migrate at different speeds through the agarose matrix under an electric field.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- DNA molecules possess a uniform negative charge due to the phosphate groups in their backbone. Because of this, when an electric field is applied, all DNA fragments are pulled towards the positive electrode (anode).

- Since the charge-to-mass ratio is virtually the same for all DNA molecules, charge alone cannot separate them.

- The agarose gel acts as a dense, porous network (a molecular sieve).

- As DNA fragments are pulled through this sieve, shorter (smaller) fragments experience less friction and can navigate through the pores faster and travel further than larger, bulkier fragments.

- Therefore, the separation is fundamentally based on the size (length or molecular weight) of the fragments.

Step 4: Final Answer:

DNA fragments separate due to the difference in the size of fragments.
Quick Tip: Electrophoresis Summary:
- \textbf{Driving Force: Negative charge of DNA moving towards positive anode.
- \textbf{Separating Factor:} Size of the fragment.
- \textbf{Rule:} Smaller pieces move faster and travel further.


Question 19:

How many of the following are the symbiotic nitrogen fixing micro-organisms?

Rhizobium, Anabaena, Frankia, Azotobacter, Nostoc, Clostridium, Beijerinckia, Klebsiella

  • (A) 2
  • (B) 3
  • (C) 4
  • (D) 5
Correct Answer: (C) 4
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Biological nitrogen fixation is performed by select prokaryotes, which can live independently in the soil (free-living) or form mutually beneficial relationships with plants (symbiotic).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the provided list of microbes and classify each as either primarily free-living or capable of symbiotic nitrogen fixation based on standard biological classifications.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's classify each organism:

1. Rhizobium: A classic symbiotic bacterium, forming nodules in leguminous plant roots.

2. Anabaena: A cyanobacterium that can form symbiotic relationships (e.g., with the water fern Azolla and roots of \textit{Cycas).

3. \textit{Frankia: Forms symbiotic root nodules in non-leguminous plants (like Alnus).

4. \textit{Azotobacter: A well-known free-living aerobic bacterium.

5. Nostoc: Similar to Anabaena, it is a cyanobacterium capable of forming symbiotic associations (e.g., in lichens and cycad roots).

6. Clostridium: A free-living anaerobic bacterium.

7. Beijerinckia: A free-living aerobic bacterium.

8. Klebsiella: Generally categorized as a free-living soil bacterium.

The symbiotic fixers are Rhizobium, \textit{Anabaena, \textit{Frankia, and \textit{Nostoc.

Step 4: Final Answer:

There are a total of 4 symbiotic nitrogen-fixing organisms in the list.
Quick Tip: Grouping Nitrogen Fixers:
\textbf{Symbiotic: Rhizobium (legumes), Frankia (non-legumes).
\textbf{Free-living Aerobic:} Azotobacter, Beijerinckia.
\textbf{Free-living Anaerobic:} Clostridium, Rhodospirillum.
\textbf{Cyanobacteria (can be both):} Nostoc, Anabaena.


Question 20:

CSF is secreted by

  • (A) choroid plexus only.
  • (B) Pia mater and choroid plexus only.
  • (C) Pia mater, choroid plexus and ependymal cells lining the ventricles.
  • (D) White matter, Pia mater and grey matter.
Correct Answer: (C) Pia mater, choroid plexus and ependymal cells lining the ventricles.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) is a clear fluid that cushions the brain and spinal cord, delivering nutrients and removing wastes.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific anatomical structures and cell layers responsible for the filtration and active secretion of CSF.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- The primary structure responsible for the production of CSF is the choroid plexus, which protrudes into the ventricles of the brain.

- Structurally, the choroid plexus is not a standalone tissue; it is composed of highly vascularized folds of the innermost meningeal layer, the pia mater.

- This vascular pia mater is intimately covered by a specialized layer of ciliated glial cells known as ependymal cells. Blood plasma filters through the capillaries of the pia mater, and the ependymal cells actively secrete this filtrate as CSF into the ventricles.

- Additionally, the regular ependymal cells that line the rest of the ventricles and the central canal also contribute to CSF secretion.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, a comprehensive description includes the pia mater, choroid plexus, and ependymal cells.
Quick Tip: The choroid plexus is essentially a specialized functional unit made of two components: a capillary network (from Pia mater) and a secretory lining (Ependymal cells).


Question 21:

Match the scientist in column I with their contribution in column II and choose the correct option.



S

  • (A) i \(-\) b ii - c iii - d iv - a
  • (B) i - c ii -a iii - d iv - b
  • (C) i-b ii-c iii-a iv-d
  • (D) i - a ii - b iii - d iv - c
Correct Answer: (B) i - c ii -a iii - d iv - b
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ecology relies heavily on foundational theories and hypotheses proposed by key scientists to explain biodiversity patterns and ecosystem stability.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Match the names of the prominent ecologists with their famous theories or quantitative estimates.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- i. Alexander Van Humboldt: During his explorations in South American jungles, he observed that species richness increased with explored area, but only up to a limit, giving us the Species-Area Relationship (c).

- ii. Rober ay (Robert May): Made a more conservative, scientifically sound estimate of global biological diversity, proposing that there are about 7 million species globally (a).

- iii. David TIllman (David Tilman): Conducted long-term field experiments proving that plots with more species showed less year-to-year variation in total biomass, formulating the Productivity-Stability hypothesis (d).

- iv. Paul Ehrlich: Used an analogy comparing an ecosystem to an airplane to explain how removing individual species affects the whole system, known as the Rivet popper hypothesis (b).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct matches are i-c, ii-a, iii-d, iv-b.
Quick Tip: Mnemonic associations:
- \textbf{Humboldt} = \textbf{Area} (Explored vast areas).
- \textbf{May} = \textbf{Millions} (Estimated 7 million).
- \textbf{Tilman} = \textbf{Tills} soil (Plots for Productivity).
- \textbf{Ehrlich} = \textbf{Air}plane (Rivet popper).


Question 22:

Given below are two statements:

Statement I - During night, guard cells become flaccid.

Statement II - During day time, guard cells become turgid due to endosmosis.

In light of above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The opening and closing of stomata are physical processes dictated by changes in the turgor pressure of the guard cells.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the physiological state of guard cells during the standard diurnal (day/night) cycle.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement II (Day time): In the presence of light, photosynthetic activity and active ion pumping (\(K^+\) influx) occur. This lowers the osmotic potential inside the guard cells, drawing water in from adjacent cells. This inward flow of water is called endosmosis. As a result, the guard cells swell and become turgid, causing the stoma to open. Therefore, Statement II is true.

- Statement I (Night time): In the absence of light, the active processes generally cease, and ions leak back out. The water potential inside the guard cells increases, causing water to flow back out into surrounding cells (exosmosis). The loss of water causes the guard cells to lose their turgor pressure and become soft or flaccid, closing the pore. Therefore, Statement I is also true.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both statements accurately describe the mechanics of stomatal regulation.
Quick Tip: Turgidity = Swollen = Stomata Open (Day).
Flaccidity = Shrunken = Stomata Closed (Night).


Question 23:

Which one of the following is an EXCEPTION to the generalization made by Mendel on the basis of his experiments on garden pea plant?

  • (A) Single trait \(\rightarrow\) single gene \(\rightarrow\) Two alleles.
  • (B) Two alleles show interaction in which one is completely dominant.
  • (C) The genotypic and phenotypic ratios are identical in monohybrid crosses.
  • (D) Factors (genes) for different traits present on different chromosomes assort independently.
Correct Answer: (C) The genotypic and phenotypic ratios are identical in monohybrid crosses.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Gregor Mendel established the fundamental laws of inheritance based on his work with pea plants, which exhibit simple, complete dominance. Later discoveries revealed deviations from his classical model.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify which statement contradicts the expected mathematical ratios or fundamental rules defined by Mendel's classical experiments.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- (A) represents Mendel's core assumption that a specific trait is governed by a single discrete factor (gene) existing in two contrasting forms (alleles).

- (B) represents the Law of Dominance, a cornerstone of Mendelian genetics.

- (D) represents the Law of Independent Assortment.

- (C) states that genotypic and phenotypic ratios are identical. In a classical Mendelian monohybrid cross (\(F_1\) heterozygote cross, e.g., Tt x Tt), the phenotypic ratio is 3:1 (Tall:Dwarf), while the genotypic ratio is 1:2:1 (TT:Tt:tt). They are distinctly different.

- Ratios are only identical (1:2:1 for both) in non-Mendelian inheritance patterns like Incomplete Dominance (e.g., Snapdragon flowers) or Codominance (e.g., AB blood type).

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, identical genotypic and phenotypic ratios represent an exception to Mendel's generalizations.
Quick Tip: In strict Mendelian traits (Complete Dominance): Phenotypic ratio (3:1) \(\neq\) Genotypic ratio (1:2:1). If a question states Phenotype Ratio = Genotype Ratio, it is always referring to Incomplete Dominance or Codominance.


Question 24:

People who consume high protein diet can develop _______________ stones.

  • (A) calcium
  • (B) uric acid
  • (C) struvite
  • (D) cystine
Correct Answer: (B) uric acid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Renal calculi (kidney stones) form when certain substances in urine become highly concentrated and crystallize. Diet heavily influences urine composition.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Relate the metabolic breakdown products of a high-protein diet to the specific type of chemical crystal that forms kidney stones.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- A diet very high in protein, particularly animal protein (like red meat and organ meats), contains high levels of purines (nitrogenous bases found in DNA/RNA).

- When the body breaks down purines, the end metabolic product is uric acid.

- High consumption of purine-rich foods leads to excessive uric acid in the blood and consequently in the urine. Furthermore, a high-protein diet increases the acidity (lowers the pH) of the urine.

- Uric acid is highly insoluble in acidic environments, leading it to precipitate out of solution and form hard uric acid stones.

- (Note: While high protein can also increase urinary calcium, the most direct metabolic link to the purines in such diets is uric acid).

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, a high protein diet is a primary risk factor for developing uric acid stones.
Quick Tip: Correlations to remember for exams:
- High Purine / Meat Diet \(\rightarrow\) Uric Acid stones.
- High Oxalate Diet (spinach, chocolate) \(\rightarrow\) Calcium Oxalate stones.
- Chronic Urinary Tract Infections \(\rightarrow\) Struvite (infection) stones.


Question 25:

In an angiospermic embryo, upper swollen suspensor cell towards the micropyle, functions as________.

  • (A) haustorium
  • (B) hypophysis
  • (C) epicotyl
  • (D) hypocotyl
Correct Answer: (A) haustorium
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

During the early development of a dicot embryo in angiosperms, the zygote divides to form a multi-cellular structure, differentiating into the embryonal mass and the suspensor.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the anatomical terminology used for the specific terminal cells of the suspensor filament based on their location and function.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- The zygote undergoes a transverse division forming a terminal cell and a basal cell. The basal cell (located towards the micropylar end of the embryo sac) divides repeatedly to form a long filament of 6 to 10 cells called the suspensor.

- The primary function of the suspensor is to mechanically push the developing embryo deep into the nutrient-rich endosperm.

- The uppermost cell of this suspensor filament, situated right at the micropylar end, becomes significantly enlarged and vesicular.

- Due to its swollen nature and its role in absorbing nutrients from the surrounding nucellar and endosperm tissues for the growing embryo, this specific cell acts as a haustorium (a specialized absorbing structure).

- The lowermost cell of the suspensor, adjacent to the embryo proper, is called the hypophysis.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The upper swollen cell functions as a haustorium.
Quick Tip: Anatomy of the Suspensor:
- Top end (Micropyle side) = Swollen, absorbs food = \textbf{Haustorium}.
- Bottom end (Embryo side) = Connects to embryo = \textbf{Hypophysis} (contributes to root tip).


Question 26:

In large proteins, peptide chains are much looped, twisted and folded back on themselves. The folded structure is due to the formation of _______________ bonds

  • (A) phosphodiester
  • (B) peptide
  • (C) disulphide
  • (D) glycosidic
Correct Answer: (C) disulphide
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Proteins exhibit different structural levels (primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary), each stabilized by specific types of chemical bonds.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific type of bond responsible for stabilizing the three-dimensional tertiary folded structure of a polypeptide chain.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Primary structure is the linear sequence of amino acids, maintained by covalent peptide bonds.

- Tertiary structure refers to the complex looping, twisting, and folding back of the chain upon itself to form a functional 3D shape. This folding is stabilized by interactions between the R-groups (side chains) of amino acids.

- A major covalent bond that locks this folded tertiary structure in place is the disulphide bond (or disulfide bridge), which forms between the sulfur atoms of two cysteine residues.

- Phosphodiester bonds link nucleotides in DNA and RNA.

- Glycosidic bonds link monosaccharides in carbohydrates.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The folded structure is due to the formation of disulphide bonds.
Quick Tip: Match the bond to the macromolecule:
- Proteins (Linear sequence) \(\rightarrow\) Peptide bond
- Proteins (3D Folding/Tertiary) \(\rightarrow\) Disulphide, Hydrogen, Ionic bonds
- Carbohydrates \(\rightarrow\) Glycosidic bond
- Nucleic Acids \(\rightarrow\) Phosphodiester bond


Question 27:

Arrange the following in sequence during the transmission of nerve impulse at chemical synapse.

i. Neurotransmitter binds with receptors of post synaptic cell.

ii. Calcium channels open and the calcium diffuses inward from ECF.

iii. Impulse travels along the axon of presynaptic neuron.

iv. Release of neurotransmitter by exocytosis.

v. Synaptic vesicles fuse with cell membrane of axon terminal of presynaptic neuron.

  • (A) i, ii, v, iii, iv
  • (B) iii, v, ii, iv, i
  • (C) ii, v, i, iii, iv
  • (D) iii, ii, v, iv, i
Correct Answer: (D) iii, ii, v, iv, i
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Synaptic transmission is the process by which a neuron communicates with a target cell across a synapse, converting an electrical signal into a chemical signal and back.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Sequence the physiological events chronologically, starting from the arrival of the action potential to the receptor binding on the post-synaptic neuron.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

1. iii. First, an electrical impulse (action potential) travels along the axon of the presynaptic neuron and reaches the axon terminal.

2. ii. The arrival of this impulse depolarizes the membrane, causing voltage-gated Calcium (\(Ca^{2+}\)) channels to open. Calcium ions diffuse inward from the extracellular fluid (ECF).

3. v. This sudden influx of \(Ca^{2+}\) stimulates synaptic vesicles to move towards and fuse with the presynaptic cell membrane.

4. iv. Once fused, the vesicles release their chemical messengers (neurotransmitters) into the synaptic cleft via exocytosis.

5. i. Finally, the neurotransmitter diffuses across the cleft and binds to specific receptors on the post-synaptic cell membrane, initiating a new impulse.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct chronological sequence is iii, ii, v, iv, i.
Quick Tip: The critical link between the electrical impulse and chemical release is Calcium (\(Ca^{2+}\)). Always place \(Ca^{2+}\) influx \textbf{after} the impulse arrives and \textbf{before} the vesicles fuse.


Question 28:

The highest level of ecological hierarchy in ecological organization is

  • (A) biome
  • (B) community
  • (C) population
  • (D) organism
Correct Answer: (A) biome
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ecological organization is structured hierarchically, from individual living entities up to massive global systems.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall the standard levels of ecological organization and arrange the given options from the smallest scale to the largest scale to identify the highest.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Organism: A single living individual (lowest level in this list).

- Population: A group of interbreeding organisms of the same species in a specific area.

- Community: All the interacting populations of different species living in a specific area.

- Ecosystem: The community interacting with its physical (abiotic) environment.

- Biome: A large, naturally occurring community of flora and fauna occupying a major habitat (e.g., forest, tundra, desert). It encompasses multiple ecosystems.

- Biosphere: The sum of all biomes; the entire zone of life on Earth. (Not listed in options).

Among the options provided, the biome represents the largest and most complex level.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The highest level of ecological hierarchy given is the biome.
Quick Tip: Hierarchy sequence to memorize:
Organism \(\rightarrow\) Population \(\rightarrow\) Community \(\rightarrow\) Ecosystem \(\rightarrow\) Biome \(\rightarrow\) Biosphere.


Question 29:

Primary productivity in an ecosystem refers to the rate of generation of _______________ .

  • (A) oxygen
  • (B) carbon dioxide
  • (C) detritus
  • (D) biomass
Correct Answer: (D) biomass
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Productivity in ecology measures the flow of energy and the creation of organic matter within an ecosystem.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Define "primary productivity" according to its standard ecological definition regarding the material synthesized by producers.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Primary productivity is defined as the rate at which solar energy is captured and converted into chemical energy (organic matter) by photosynthetic and chemosynthetic autotrophs (producers).

- This newly created organic matter—essentially the living material of the plants—is referred to in ecology as biomass.

- It is typically expressed in terms of weight (\(g/m^2/year\)) or energy (\(kcal/m^2/year\)).

- While oxygen is a byproduct of photosynthesis, and carbon dioxide is consumed, productivity specifically quantifies the generation of the organic material (biomass) itself.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Primary productivity refers to the rate of generation of biomass.
Quick Tip: - \textbf{Primary Productivity:} Generation of biomass by producers (plants).
- \textbf{Secondary Productivity:} Generation of biomass by consumers (animals).
Always associate "productivity" directly with "biomass" or "organic matter".


Question 30:

Cells of malignant tumor spread from one organ to other via blood or lymph and cause new tumor. This property is called _______________ .

  • (A) metastasis
  • (B) parthenogenesis
  • (C) interkinesis
  • (D) metamorphosis
Correct Answer: (A) metastasis
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Tumors are categorized into benign (localized) and malignant (cancerous). The danger of cancer primarily lies in its ability to spread.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific medical and biological term used to describe the dissemination of cancer cells to secondary sites.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Malignant tumors consist of cells that exhibit uncontrolled growth and the ability to invade surrounding tissues.

- A critical and dangerous characteristic of malignant cells is that they can slough off from the primary tumor mass, enter the bloodstream or lymphatic vessels, and travel to distant organs.

- Once lodged in a new location, they begin dividing to form secondary tumors. This specific property of spreading is called metastasis.

- Let's define the other terms for clarity:

- Parthenogenesis: Development of an embryo from an unfertilized egg.

- Interkinesis: A brief resting phase between meiosis I and meiosis II.

- Metamorphosis: A biological process by which an animal physically develops after birth/hatching (e.g., caterpillar to butterfly).

Step 4: Final Answer:

This property is called metastasis.
Quick Tip: Metastasis is the defining hallmark of malignant tumors that distinguishes them from benign tumors. It is the primary cause of cancer-related mortality.


Question 31:

Haemoglobin has maximum affinity for

  • (A) \(CO_2\)
  • (B) \(O_2\)
  • (C) CO
  • (D) \(H^{+}\)
Correct Answer: (C) CO
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Haemoglobin is the iron-containing respiratory pigment in red blood cells that transports gases between the lungs and tissues.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Compare the binding affinities (strength of attachment) of hemoglobin for different physiological and toxic gases.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Haemoglobin naturally binds with Oxygen (\(O_2\)) to form oxyhemoglobin, facilitating respiration.

- It also binds with Carbon dioxide (\(CO_2\)) to form carbaminohemoglobin for waste removal.

- However, when exposed to Carbon monoxide (CO), haemoglobin binds to it with an extremely high affinity—approximately 200 to 250 times greater than its affinity for oxygen.

- Because of this high affinity, CO easily displaces oxygen from hemoglobin, forming a highly stable and dangerous compound called carboxyhemoglobin. This severely reduces the oxygen-carrying capacity of the blood, leading to carbon monoxide poisoning.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Haemoglobin has the maximum affinity for Carbon monoxide (CO).
Quick Tip: Distinguish the complexes:
- \textbf{Carboxyhemoglobin:} Hemoglobin + \textbf{CO} (Toxic, highly stable).
- \textbf{Carbaminohemoglobin:} Hemoglobin + \(CO_2\) (Normal physiological process).
- \textbf{Oxyhemoglobin:} Hemoglobin + \(O_2\) (Normal physiological process).


Question 32:

Given below are two statements:

Statement I - In prokaryotes, there is only replicon however in eukaryotes, these are several replicons in tandem.

Statement II - Two separated strands in a replicon of DNA are prevented from re-joining by helicase enzyme.

In light of above statements, choose the correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

DNA replication involves unwinding the double helix and utilizing various enzymes. A "replicon" is a unit of DNA that replicates from a single origin.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate Statement I based on the number of origins of replication in different domains of life, and evaluate Statement II based on the specific function of replication enzymes (Helicase vs. SSBP).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I: Prokaryotic chromosomes are generally small and circular, possessing a single origin of replication; thus, the whole chromosome acts as one replicon. Eukaryotic chromosomes are massive and linear, requiring multiple origins of replication to duplicate efficiently in a reasonable time; thus, they have several replicons in tandem. Statement I is correct.

- Statement II: The enzyme Helicase acts to break the hydrogen bonds between nitrogenous bases, effectively unwinding and separating the two DNA strands. However, it does not prevent them from snapping back together. That specific role is performed by Single Strand Binding Proteins (SSBPs), which bind to the separated strands and stabilize them. Therefore, attributing this prevention to helicase makes Statement II incorrect.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement I is correct and Statement II is incorrect.
Quick Tip: Enzyme roles in replication:
- \textbf{Helicase:} "Unzips" the genes (breaks H-bonds).
- \textbf{SSBPs:} "Holds the zipper open" (prevents re-joining).
- \textbf{Ligase:} "Glues" fragments together.


Question 33:

Which of the following characteristics are seen in a stable community?

i. It is strong enough to withstand environmental disturbance and recovers quickly.

ii. It is resistant to invasive species.

iii. It exhibits constant change in biomass production over a period of time.

iv. It has more species diversity.

  • (A) i, iii and iv only
  • (B) i, ii and iv only
  • (C) i, ii and iii only
  • (D) ii and iv only
Correct Answer: (B) i, ii and iv only
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ecological stability refers to a community's ability to maintain its structure and function over time, despite internal fluctuations or external stresses.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Analyze each characteristic against the ecological definitions of community stability and David Tilman's experimental conclusions on biodiversity.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- i. Withstand disturbance: A stable community is characterized by its resistance (ability to remain unchanged during a disturbance) and resilience (ability to recover quickly afterward). This is a correct characteristic.

- ii. Resistant to invasive species: High stability implies that ecological niches are well-occupied, making it difficult for alien or invasive species to establish themselves and disrupt the system. This is a correct characteristic.

- iii. Constant change in biomass production: This is incorrect. A truly stable community exhibits less year-to-year variation in total biomass. Constant, drastic changes in productivity indicate instability.

- iv. More species diversity: Based on Tilman's plots and general ecological principles, higher species diversity generally contributes to greater ecosystem stability and productivity. This is a correct characteristic.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct characteristics are i, ii, and iv.
Quick Tip: Features of a stable ecosystem:
1. Minimal variation in productivity (biomass) year-to-year.
2. High resistance/resilience to disturbances.
3. High resistance to alien species invasions.


Question 34:

Given below are two statements:

Statement I - Back cross is the crossing of \(F_1\) hybrid with one of the two parents from which they were derived.

Statement II - Test cross involves the crossing of \(F_1\) hybrid with its homozygous recessive parent.

In light of above statements, choose the correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Mendelian genetics utilizes specific mating strategies to uncover unknown genotypes and study inheritance patterns.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Define the terms 'back cross' and 'test cross' to verify the accuracy of the biological definitions provided in the statements.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I (Back Cross): A back cross is literally crossing an offspring (usually an \(F_1\) hybrid) backward with either of its original parents (dominant or recessive). It is used to achieve offspring with a genetic identity closer to that specific parent. This statement provides an accurate definition.

- Statement II (Test Cross): A test cross is a specific sub-type of a back cross. It specifically involves crossing an organism showing a dominant phenotype (whose genotype is unknown, like an \(F_1\) hybrid) exclusively with the homozygous recessive parent. By analyzing the phenotypic ratio of the offspring, the unknown genotype can be determined. This statement is also completely accurate.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both statements are correct definitions.
Quick Tip: Logic rule in genetics: All test crosses are back crosses (because you are crossing with a parental type), but not all back crosses are test crosses (because you can also back cross with a dominant parent).


Question 35:

Complete the analogy with respect to structure of sperm

Nebenkern : ' X ' :: Acrosome is formed from : ' Y '

  • (A) 'X' Mitochondria, 'Y' centrioles
  • (B) 'X' Nucleus, 'Y' Golgi body
  • (C) 'X' Mitochondria, 'Y' Golgi body
  • (D) 'X' Nucleus, 'Y' centrioles
Correct Answer: (C) 'X' Mitochondria, 'Y' Golgi body
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

During spermiogenesis, a round spermatid undergoes massive morphological changes to become a motile spermatozoon. Normal cellular organelles are heavily modified.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Map the highly specialized structural components of the mature sperm (Nebenkern and Acrosome) back to their specific precursor organelles.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Nebenkern: In the middle piece of a mammalian sperm, the mitochondria arrange themselves in a tight spiral or helical sheath around the axial filament. This specific mitochondrial spiral is called the Nebenkern. It acts as the powerhouse, providing ATP for tail movement. Therefore, 'X' represents Mitochondria.

- Acrosome: The anterior part of the sperm head is covered by a cap-like structure called the acrosome. It is filled with hydrolytic enzymes necessary for penetrating the egg investments during fertilization. Developmentally, the acrosome is derived entirely from the Golgi complex (or Golgi body) of the spermatid. Therefore, 'Y' represents the Golgi body.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Matching X and Y correctly points to option (C).
Quick Tip: Organelle transformations to memorize:
- \textbf{Golgi body} \(\rightarrow\) forms Acrosome.
- \textbf{Mitochondria} \(\rightarrow\) forms Nebenkern.
- \textbf{Centrioles} \(\rightarrow\) form Axial filament (tail).


Question 36:

Given below are two statements:

Statement I - The muscularis of intestine can be differentiated into longitudinal and oblique muscles only.

Statement II - The muscularis of stomach is made up of outer- longitudinal, middle oblique and inner circular muscles.

In light of above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The wall of the human alimentary canal generally consists of four layers: serosa, muscularis externa, submucosa, and mucosa. The muscularis layer shows specific variations in different organs to facilitate different types of mechanical digestion.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall the exact histological arrangement of the muscularis externa layers (from outside to inside) in the intestine and the stomach.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I: In the typical intestine, the muscularis layer is composed of an outer longitudinal muscle layer and an inner circular muscle layer. It lacks an oblique muscle layer. Therefore, stating it has longitudinal and oblique muscles is incorrect.

- Statement II: The stomach has the thickest muscularis to allow for vigorous churning. It is unique in having three layers. The correct sequence from outside to inside is: outer longitudinal, middle circular, and an inner oblique layer. The statement incorrectly identifies the sequence as "middle oblique and inner circular". Therefore, Statement II is also incorrect.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Because both anatomical descriptions are flawed, both statements are incorrect.
Quick Tip: Standard Muscularis arrangement (Outer to Inner):
- \textbf{General tract (Intestine):} Outer Longitudinal \(\rightarrow\) Inner Circular.
- \textbf{Stomach (Extra churning):} Outer Longitudinal \(\rightarrow\) Middle Circular \(\rightarrow\) Inner Oblique.


Question 37:

An organ with sphincters at its origin is

  • (A) urinary bladder
  • (B) urethra
  • (C) ureter
  • (D) renal pelvic
Correct Answer: (B) urethra
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Sphincters are circular muscles that act as valves to control the flow of fluids through tubes or openings in the body.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Anatomically trace the flow of urine from the kidneys to the outside, and identify which structure begins immediately with a sphincter muscle.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Ureter: Carries urine from the renal pelvis to the bladder. It does not have a true anatomical sphincter at its origin (renal pelvis) or termination (bladder), relying instead on physiological oblique entry into the bladder to prevent backflow.

- Urinary bladder: A storage sac. The ureters enter it, and the urethra exits it. It doesn't have a sphincter at an "origin" point.

- Urethra: This is the tube carrying urine from the bladder to the exterior. Right at the junction where the urethra originates from the urinary bladder, there is a prominent ring of smooth muscle called the internal urethral sphincter. (There is also an external sphincter further down).

Step 4: Final Answer:

Therefore, the urethra is the organ characterized by having a sphincter at its origin.
Quick Tip: The bladder needs to hold urine securely. Therefore, the "drainpipe" (urethra) must be sealed off exactly where it starts (its origin). This seal is the internal urethral sphincter.


Question 38:

The size of mRNA is generally related to

  • (A) the number of codons it has
  • (B) the size of the ribosome
  • (C) the size of entire DNA molecule
  • (D) the number of anticodons it has
Correct Answer: (A) the number of codons it has
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Messenger RNA (mRNA) acts as the intermediary between the genetic code in DNA and the synthesized protein.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Relate the structural composition of an mRNA molecule to the genetic information it carries for translation.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- The primary sequence of an mRNA molecule is read by the ribosome in groups of three nucleotides, called codons.

- Each codon (with the exception of stop codons) specifies one amino acid in the resulting polypeptide chain.

- Therefore, a longer polypeptide requires more instructions, meaning the mRNA must contain a proportionally larger number of codons. Thus, the overall size or length of the mRNA is directly related to the number of codons it possesses.

- The size of the ribosome (B) is fixed and independent of the mRNA.

- The entire DNA molecule (C) is vast, containing thousands of genes; mRNA is only a small transcript of one gene.

- Anticodons (D) are structural features of transfer RNA (tRNA), not mRNA.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The size of mRNA is related to the number of codons it has.
Quick Tip: mRNA carries \textbf{Codons}. tRNA carries \textbf{Anticodons}.
Rule of thumb: Length of mRNA (in bases) \(\approx\) 3 \(\times\) Number of amino acids in the protein.


Question 39:

Given below are two statements:

Statement I - Reactions involved in Krebs cycle are anabolic and catabolic.

Statement II - During oxidation of acetyl Co-A, stepwise oxidation of acetyl part of acetyl Co-A occurs.

In light of above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The Krebs cycle (Citric Acid Cycle) is a central hub of cellular metabolism occurring in the mitochondrial matrix.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the amphibolic (dual) nature of the Krebs cycle and the sequential chemical breakdown of the acetyl group entering it.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Statement I: The Krebs cycle primarily breaks down (oxidizes) acetyl-CoA to yield energy, which is a catabolic function. However, its intermediate compounds (like \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate, oxaloacetate) are frequently siphoned off to synthesize amino acids, cytochromes, and other molecules, which is an anabolic function. Because it serves both pathways, it is called an amphibolic pathway. Thus, Statement I is correct.

- Statement II: The cycle starts when the 2-carbon acetyl group of Acetyl-CoA condenses with oxaloacetate to form citric acid. Through a series of successive reactions involving dehydrogenation (oxidation) and decarboxylation, this acetyl unit is broken down stepwise, ultimately releasing two molecules of \(CO_2\). Thus, stepwise oxidation does occur. Statement II is correct.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both statements are biologically accurate.
Quick Tip: The Krebs cycle is the classic example of an \textbf{Amphibolic pathway}:
- Catabolism: Breaks down Acetyl-CoA to \(CO_2\) and energy.
- Anabolism: Provides carbon skeletons (intermediates) for synthesizing other biomolecules.


Question 40:

Match the valves of human heart in column I with the respective opening they guard in column II and select the correct option.


  • (A) i-c ii-d iii-b iv-a
  • (B) i-c ii-d iii-a iv-b
  • (C) i-d ii-c iii-b iv-a
  • (D) i-b ii-a iii-c iv-d
Correct Answer: (A) i-c ii-d iii-b iv-a
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The human heart contains several valves that ensure blood flows in only one direction, preventing backflow into the atria or ventricles.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Systematically map each specific heart valve to the anatomical aperture it regulates based on cardiovascular anatomy.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- i. Eustachian valve: This is a valve found at the junction where the inferior vena cava empties deoxygenated blood into the right atrium (c).

- ii. Thebesian valve: This valve guards the opening of the coronary sinus, which drains deoxygenated blood from the heart wall itself into the right atrium (d).

- iii. Mitral valve: Also called the bicuspid valve, it separates the left atrium from the left ventricle, guarding the left atrioventricular aperture (b).

- iv. Semilunar valve: These pocket-like valves are found at the base of large vessels leaving the heart. Specifically, the pulmonary semilunar valve guards the opening of the pulmonary aorta/artery (a).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct matches are i-c, ii-d, iii-b, iv-a.
Quick Tip: Mnemonic for major valves:
\textbf{LAB RAT}
\textbf{L}eft \textbf{A}trium \(\rightarrow\) \textbf{B}icuspid (Mitral)
\textbf{R}ight \textbf{A}trium \(\rightarrow\) \textbf{T}ricuspid


Question 41:

The \rule{1cm}{0.15mm} gene from Bacillus thuringiensis produces a protein that forms crystalline inclusions in bacterial spores.

  • (A) cry
  • (B) myc
  • (C) ras
  • (D) nif
Correct Answer: (A) \textit{cry}
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Bacillus thuringiensis (Bt) is a soil bacterium renowned in biotechnology for producing insecticidal toxins, which are utilized to create pest-resistant genetically modified crops.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific nomenclature for the gene responsible for synthesizing the insecticidal crystal protein in Bt.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- During a specific phase of its growth, \textit{Bacillus thuringiensis produces proteinaceous crystals. These crystals contain a highly toxic insecticidal protein.

- The specific gene family that codes for these crystalline toxic proteins is named the \textit{cry gene (derived directly from the word "crystal"). Different cry genes (like \textit{cryIAc) are toxic to different insect pests.

- \textit{myc and \textit{ras are well-known oncogenes related to cancer in animals.

- \textit{nif genes are responsible for nitrogen fixation in bacteria like \textit{Rhizobium.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The gene is the \textit{cry gene.
Quick Tip: Association to remember:
\textit{Bacillus thuringiensis (Bt) \(\rightarrow\) \textbf{Cry}stal proteins \(\rightarrow\) encoded by \textbf{cry} genes \(\rightarrow\) kills insects (e.g., bollworms in Bt Cotton).


Question 42:

Lateral sulcus separates _______________ .

  • (A) frontal lobe from parietal lobe
  • (B) parietal lobe from occipital lobe
  • (C) temporal lobe from frontal and parietal lobes
  • (D) parietal lobe from occipital and frontal lobes
Correct Answer: (C) temporal lobe from frontal and parietal lobes
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The cerebral cortex is highly folded into ridges (gyri) and deep grooves (sulci). These sulci act as anatomical landmarks that divide the cerebrum into distinct functional lobes.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall the gross anatomy of the brain and locate the structural boundaries defined by the prominent lateral sulcus (also known as the Sylvian fissure).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Central sulcus: A vertical groove that separates the frontal lobe (anteriorly) from the parietal lobe (posteriorly).

- Parieto-occipital sulcus: Separates the parietal lobe from the occipital lobe at the back.

- Lateral sulcus: This is a very deep, prominent horizontal cleft on the lateral surface of the brain. It runs beneath the frontal and parietal lobes, separating them from the temporal lobe which is situated below it.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The lateral sulcus separates the temporal lobe from the frontal and parietal lobes.
Quick Tip: Visualize the brain laterally:
- \textbf{Central Sulcus} drops down from the top, splitting Frontal and Parietal.
- \textbf{Lateral Sulcus} runs horizontally from the front, acting as a shelf that holds up the Frontal and Parietal lobes, with the Temporal lobe sitting underneath.


Question 43:

Which of the following is INCORRECT about Primary and Secondary ecological successions?

  • (A) Primary succession occurs where no living organisms were present before.
  • (B) Primary succession is slow.
  • (C) Secondary succession is quicker.
  • (D) Soil is already present where primary succession takes place.
Correct Answer: (D) Soil is already present where primary succession takes place.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ecological succession is the gradual process by which ecosystems change and develop over time. It is categorized into primary and secondary based on the starting conditions.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Compare the definitions and starting conditions of primary versus secondary succession to identify the logically false statement.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Primary succession begins in completely barren, lifeless areas (like bare rock, cooled lava, or newly formed ponds). Because there is no pre-existing soil, soil must be formed slowly over hundreds or thousands of years by weathering and pioneer species (like lichens). Thus, statements (A) and (B) are correct.

- Secondary succession occurs in areas where a previously existing community was removed by a disturbance (like a fire or deforestation). Crucially, soil and some seeds/roots are already present. Because the soil foundation is there, this process is much quicker. Thus, statement (C) is correct.

- Statement (D) asserts that soil is already present in primary succession. This directly contradicts the fundamental definition of primary succession.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement (D) is the incorrect one.
Quick Tip: The core differentiator:
\textbf{Primary Succession} \(\rightarrow\) Starts on bare rock \(\rightarrow\) NO SOIL \(\rightarrow\) Very slow.
\textbf{Secondary Succession} \(\rightarrow\) Starts after a disaster \(\rightarrow\) HAS SOIL \(\rightarrow\) Faster.


Question 44:

Following are viral diseases in poultry, EXCEPT _______________

  • (A) Ranikhet
  • (B) Avian influenza
  • (C) Pullorum
  • (D) Bronchitis
Correct Answer: (C) Pullorum
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Poultry management requires identifying and treating various infectious diseases caused by different pathogens (viruses, bacteria, fungi).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Classify each listed poultry disease by its causative agent to find the one that is not caused by a virus.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- (A) Ranikhet disease: Also known as Newcastle disease, it is a highly contagious and fatal viral disease.

- (B) Avian influenza: Commonly known as bird flu, it is caused by Influenza A viruses.

- (D) Infectious Bronchitis: An acute respiratory disease of chickens caused by a coronavirus.

- (C) Pullorum disease: This is a highly fatal disease, especially in young chicks, characterized by white diarrhea. It is caused by the bacterium Salmonella enterica serovar Pullorum. Therefore, it is a bacterial disease, not viral.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Pullorum is the exception.
Quick Tip: Common Poultry Pathogens:
- \textbf{Viruses: Ranikhet, Bird Flu, Fowl Pox, Infectious Bronchitis.
- \textbf{Bacteria:} Pullorum (Bacillary white diarrhea), Fowl Cholera, Coryza.


Question 45:

All the 64 codons in the dictionary of genetic code were deciphered by _______________

  • (A) Watson and Crick
  • (B) Dr. Har Gobind Khorana
  • (C) Yanofski and Sarabhai
  • (D) Nirenberg, Matthaei and Ochoa
Correct Answer: (D) Nirenberg, Matthaei and Ochoa
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The genetic code is a dictionary that maps 3-letter RNA codons to specific amino acids. Deciphering this was a monumental collaborative effort in molecular biology during the 1960s.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the scientists canonically credited in standard curricula with the primary experimental breakthroughs that cracked the genetic code.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Marshall Nirenberg and Heinrich Matthaei made the first major breakthrough using a cell-free system. They synthesized an artificial RNA of entirely uracil (poly-U) and discovered it produced a polypeptide of pure phenylalanine, thus cracking the first codon (UUU = Phe).

- Severo Ochoa discovered the enzyme polynucleotide phosphorylase, which allowed scientists to polymerize RNA without a template, a crucial tool for these experiments.

- These foundational cell-free experiments laid the groundwork. (Note: Har Gobind Khorana later developed essential chemical synthesis techniques to create defined RNA sequences, which was vital to completing the dictionary. However, in many standard multiple-choice formats, the triad of Nirenberg, Matthaei, and Ochoa is grouped as the foundational team representing the enzymatic/cell-free deciphering of the code).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The credit is generally grouped to Nirenberg, Matthaei, and Ochoa for the foundational methodology.
Quick Tip: Key contributors to the Genetic Code:
- \textbf{Gamow:} Theorized the "triplet" code.
- \textbf{Nirenberg \& Matthaei:} First experimental proof (poly-U).
- \textbf{Ochoa:} Provided the enzyme to make artificial RNA.
- \textbf{Khorana:} Synthesized specific repeating RNA sequences to finish the job.


Question 46:

Median vertical depression of external genitalia in females, enclosing the urethral and vaginal opening is _______________

  • (A) Mons pubis
  • (B) Vestibule
  • (C) Clitoris
  • (D) Hymen
Correct Answer: (B) Vestibule
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The female external genitalia (vulva) consists of several distinct anatomical structures with specific locations and functions.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific anatomical term for the recessed area bounded by the labia minora that houses the primary tract openings.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Mons pubis: The anterior cushion of fatty tissue covered by pubic hair.

- Clitoris: A small erectile structure situated at the anterior junction of the labia minora.

- Hymen: A mucous membrane that partially covers the vaginal opening itself.

- Vestibule: This is the boat-shaped, median vertical depression enclosed laterally by the labia minora. It serves as the common entrance area that contains both the external urethral orifice (for urine) and the vaginal orifice (for reproduction).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The depression is called the vestibule.
Quick Tip: In general anatomy, a "vestibule" is an entrance hall or antechamber. In the female reproductive system, it acts as the literal entrance space containing the openings to the inner tracts.


Question 47:

Bird pollinated flowers are usually _______________

  • (A) large, showy and brightly coloured
  • (B) small and brightly coloured
  • (C) large and colourless
  • (D) with strong fragrance
Correct Answer: (A) large, showy and brightly coloured
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Plants evolve specific floral traits (pollination syndromes) to attract their most effective pollinators. Pollination by birds is termed ornithophily.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Deduce the physical characteristics a flower must possess to attract birds, keeping in mind the sensory strengths and weaknesses of birds.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Sensory profile of birds: Birds generally have excellent color vision, particularly sensitive to reds, but they have a very poorly developed sense of smell.

- To attract them from a distance, the flowers must be visually striking. Thus, they are typically large, showy, and brightly colored (most often red, orange, or yellow).

- Because birds cannot smell well, these flowers usually lack a strong fragrance (unlike moth or bee-pollinated flowers).

- They must be large and sturdy enough to support a feeding bird and hold large amounts of nectar.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Bird-pollinated flowers are usually large, showy, and brightly coloured.
Quick Tip: Match the pollinator to the flower trait:
- \textbf{Birds:} Bright red/yellow, large, odorless, lots of nectar.
- \textbf{Bees:} Blue/yellow/UV patterns, sweet scent, landing platforms.
- \textbf{Moths/Bats:} White/pale, open at night, strong heavy scent.
- \textbf{Wind:} Small, dull, no scent, no nectar, exposed stamens.


Question 48:

Complete the following analogy.

Parietal wall of Bowman's capsule : squamous epithelium :: PCT : _______________ epithelium.

  • (A) ciliated
  • (B) cuboidal
  • (C) squamous
  • (D) transitional
Correct Answer: (B) cuboidal
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Different segments of the nephron in the kidney are lined by specific types of epithelial tissues that are structurally adapted to their physiological functions.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the functional requirement of the Proximal Convoluted Tubule (PCT) and match it to the appropriate epithelial tissue type.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- The analogy establishes a relationship between a nephron structure and its epithelial lining. The parietal wall of Bowman's capsule primarily acts as a boundary container and is lined by flat, simple squamous epithelium.

- The PCT (Proximal Convoluted Tubule) is the primary site of tubular reabsorption, reabsorbing nearly all essential nutrients and a large volume of water and ions.

- To perform this heavy active transport, the cells need room for many mitochondria and a large surface area. Therefore, the PCT is lined by simple cuboidal epithelium (specifically with a brush border of microvilli to maximize surface area).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The PCT is lined by cuboidal epithelium.
Quick Tip: Histology of Nephron tubules:
- \textbf{Bowman's capsule (parietal) \& Descending Loop of Henle:} Squamous (thin for boundary/diffusion).
- \textbf{PCT \& DCT:} Cuboidal (thicker for active transport/secretion).


Question 49:

Complete the following reaction by replacing (Y) with proper word.

Emulsified fats \(\xrightarrow{Lipases}\) Fatty acids + (Y)

  • (A) monoglycerides
  • (B) monosaccharides
  • (C) disaccharides
  • (D) triglycerides
Correct Answer: (A) monoglycerides
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Dietary fats are primarily triglycerides. Their digestion in the small intestine involves mechanical breakdown (emulsification) followed by chemical hydrolysis by enzymes.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the chemical end-products of triglyceride hydrolysis catalyzed by pancreatic lipases.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Bile salts first break large fat globules into smaller droplets (emulsified fats) to increase surface area.

- The enzyme lipase then acts on these emulsified triglycerides.

- A triglyceride consists of a glycerol backbone attached to three fatty acids. Lipase systematically breaks the ester bonds.

- It typically removes two fatty acids from the outer positions of the glycerol, resulting in free fatty acids and a monoglyceride (a glycerol attached to one fatty acid).

- Monosaccharides and disaccharides are sugars (from carbohydrates). Triglycerides are the starting reactants, not the products.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The product (Y) represents monoglycerides.
Quick Tip: Digestive end products absorbed in the small intestine:
- \textbf{Carbohydrates:} Monosaccharides (Glucose, Fructose).
- \textbf{Proteins:} Amino acids.
- \textbf{Fats (Triglycerides):} Fatty acids and Monoglycerides.


Question 50:

Complete the following analogy with respect to classification of mammals.

Marsupials : (i) :: monotremes : (ii)

  • (A) (i) pouched mammals, (ii) placental mammals
  • (B) (i) pouched mammals, (ii) egg laying mammals
  • (C) (i) placental mammals, (ii) egg laying mammals
  • (D) (i) placental mammals, (ii) pouched mammals
Correct Answer: (B) (i) pouched mammals, (ii) egg laying mammals
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The mammalian class is divided into three major taxonomic groups based entirely on their reproductive strategies.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Match the scientific subclasses of mammals (Metatheria and Prototheria) to their common descriptive reproductive terms.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Marsupials (Subclass Metatheria) give birth to highly altricial (undeveloped) young, which then crawl into a special external pouch on the mother's abdomen to complete their development while nursing. Therefore, they are commonly called pouched mammals. Thus, (i) = pouched mammals.

- Monotremes (Subclass Prototheria) are the most primitive mammals. They retain reptilian traits and reproduce by laying eggs rather than giving live birth. Therefore, they are commonly called egg laying mammals. Thus, (ii) = egg laying mammals.

- The third group, Eutherians, represents the placental mammals.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Matching the terms gives us option (B).
Quick Tip: The three groups of mammals:
1. \textbf{Prototheria (Monotremes):} Egg-laying (e.g., Platypus, Echidna).
2. \textbf{Metatheria (Marsupials):} Pouched (e.g., Kangaroo, Koala).
3. \textbf{Eutheria (Placentals):} True placenta (e.g., Humans, Dogs).


Question 51:

While studying flowering behaviour in ________ and ________ plant, Garner and Allard discovered photoperiodism.

  • (A) rice, wheat
  • (B) tobacco, soyabean
  • (C) tomato, soyabean
  • (D) wheat, tobacco
Correct Answer: (B) tobacco, soyabean
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Photoperiodism is the physiological reaction of organisms to the length of night or a dark period, which heavily influences flowering in plants.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Recall the historical experiments conducted by W.W. Garner and H.A. Allard in 1920 that led to the discovery of photoperiodism.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Garner and Allard observed this phenomenon while studying the flowering behaviour of a specific mutant variety of tobacco called "Maryland Mammoth" (\textit{Nicotiana tabacum) and in soyabean (\textit{Glycine max). They found that these specific plants flowered only when exposed to short days (or more importantly, long continuous dark periods). This observation led them to classify these plants as Short Day Plants (SDP) and coined the term "photoperiodism".

Step 4: Final Answer:

The plants studied were tobacco and soyabean, making option (B) correct. Quick Tip: Always associate the foundational discovery of photoperiodism by Garner and Allard with the "Maryland Mammoth" tobacco and soyabean plants.


Question 52:

Which of the following bacteria do not solubilize the insoluble rock phosphate?

  • (A) Bacillus polymyxa and Pseudomonas striata.
  • (B) Micrococcus and Aspergillus spp.
  • (C) Pseudomonas striata and Agrobacterium.
  • (D) Klebsiella and Beijerinckia.
Correct Answer: (D) Klebsiella and Beijerinckia.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Phosphate Solubilizing Microorganisms (PSM) include bacteria and fungi capable of solubilizing inorganic phosphorus from insoluble compounds (like rock phosphate) and making it available for plant roots.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Differentiate between microorganisms known primarily for nitrogen fixation versus those known for phosphate solubilization.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Options (A) and (C) include Pseudomonas (e.g., \textit{P. striata), \textit{Bacillus (e.g., \textit{B. polymyxa), and \textit{Agrobacterium, which are well-known phosphate solubilizing bacteria.

- Option (B) includes \textit{Micrococcus (a bacterium) and \textit{Aspergillus (a fungus), both of which are prominent phosphate solubilizers.

- Option (D) lists \textit{Klebsiella and \textit{Beijerinckia. These are primarily recognized as free-living, non-symbiotic nitrogen-fixing bacteria, rather than primary phosphate solubilizers. Therefore, they are the ones that "do not" primarily fit the PSM category.

Step 4: Final Answer:

\textit{Klebsiella and \textit{Beijerinckia do not solubilize insoluble rock phosphate. Quick Tip: Group \textit{Beijerinckia, Azotobacter, and Klebsiella together as classic examples of free-living Nitrogen fixers to easily eliminate them in questions regarding other nutrient cycles.


Question 53:

Atherosclerosis can be treated with recombinant protein called ________

  • (A) platelet derived growth factor.
  • (B) interleukin -1 receptor.
  • (C) tissue plasminogen activator.
  • (D) macrophage activating factor.
Correct Answer: (C) tissue plasminogen activator.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Atherosclerosis involves the build-up of plaque in arteries, which can lead to the formation of dangerous blood clots (thrombosis) that cause heart attacks or strokes.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the specific recombinant therapeutic protein utilized to break down and dissolve blood clots in acute medical emergencies.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (tPA) is a vital enzyme used as a "clot-buster" drug. It acts by catalyzing the conversion of plasminogen into plasmin. Plasmin is an enzyme that aggressively breaks down the fibrin mesh forming the structural core of a blood clot. Treating atherosclerosis complications (like myocardial infarction) heavily relies on tPA to rapidly restore blood flow.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct recombinant protein is tissue plasminogen activator. Quick Tip: tPA is the gold standard emergency "clot-buster" in the treatment of myocardial infarctions and ischemic strokes caused by atherosclerosis.


Question 54:

Match elements given in Column I with their deficiency symptoms shown by plants given in Column II

  • (A) i-c ii-a iii-d iv-b
  • (B) i-c ii-a iii-b iv-d
  • (C) i-c ii-b iii-d iv-a
  • (D) i-b ii-a iii-d iv-c
Correct Answer: (B) i-c ii-a iii-b iv-d
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Essential mineral elements cause highly specific deficiency symptoms in plants, which are crucial for diagnosing plant health.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Match the universally recognized plant nutrient deficiency diseases with their corresponding trace elements. Recognize typographical errors in the question table and solve via elimination.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Boron (ii): A classic symptom of boron deficiency is "Brown heart disease" in root crops like turnips and beets. Thus, ii \(\rightarrow\) a.

- Zinc (iii): Zinc deficiency characteristically causes "little leaf" and "malformed leaves" due to its role in auxin synthesis. Thus, iii \(\rightarrow\) b.

- Copper (iv): A well-known symptom of copper deficiency is the "Die-back of shoots", particularly prevalent in citrus trees. Thus, iv \(\rightarrow\) d (noting the typo in the table where 'd' is labeled 'c').

- Item (i): "Eustachian valve" is clearly a typographical error in the original exam paper (it is a heart valve). By eliminating the known pairs, item 'i' matches with the general symptom 'c' (Poor growth of the plant).

The correct pairing is i-c, ii-a, iii-b, iv-d.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (B) provides the correct matching sequence. Quick Tip: In matching tables with obvious typos (like "Eustachian valve" or repeated letters like "c" and "c"), match the unambiguous elements first (Boron/Zinc/Copper) to find the unique correct option.


Question 55:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - Biome constitute, a large regional terrestrial unit delimited by a specific climate zone having major vegetation zone and associated fauna.

Statement II - Biome is the fourth level of ecological hierarchy.

In light of above statements, select the correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ecology is studied across various hierarchical levels of biological organization, ranging from individual organisms to the entire biosphere.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Evaluate both statements against standard definitions of ecological terms and hierarchical structures as outlined in core biology textbooks.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Statement I: This is the exact definition of a biome. A biome is indeed a very large terrestrial region characterized by its specific climate (temperature and precipitation), which dictates the dominant vegetation type (flora) and the animal life (fauna) that can survive there.

Statement II: Standard introductory ecology (like NCERT) defines the four primary levels of biological organisation relevant to ecology as: 1. Organisms \(\rightarrow\) 2. Populations \(\rightarrow\) 3. Communities \(\rightarrow\) 4. Biomes. Therefore, placing biome as the fourth level is considered factually correct in this context.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Since both definitions strictly align with standard ecological curriculum, both statements are correct. Quick Tip: Memorize the four core ecological levels: Organism, Population, Community, Biome. Any reference to a biome being the fourth level is generally treated as correct in standard exams.


Question 56:

Identify the INCORRECT statement.

  • (A) Around \(25%\) of the drugs sold in the global medicine market worldwide are plant derivatives.
  • (B) \(25,000\) plant species are put to use by tribals worldwide as traditional medicines.
  • (C) The relationship between diversity and well being of ecosystem is linear.
  • (D) Rich diversity leads to lesser variation in biomass production over a period of time.
Correct Answer: (C) The relationship between diversity and well being of ecosystem is linear.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Biodiversity provides immense utility and stability to ecosystems. Understanding the mathematical and theoretical models of ecosystem stability is key here.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Evaluate each statement's factual accuracy based on established ecological studies and biodiversity utilization statistics.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Options (A) and (B) are well-established facts representing the 'narrowly utilitarian' arguments for conserving biodiversity.

- Option (D) is correct and is based on David Tilman's long-term outdoor field experiments. He demonstrated that plots with higher species richness showed significantly less year-to-year variation in total biomass (increased stability).

- Option (C) is the incorrect statement. The relationship between biodiversity and ecosystem well-being is not strictly linear. Ecological models, such as Paul Ehrlich's "Rivet Popper Hypothesis," suggest a non-linear threshold effect. An ecosystem might initially absorb the loss of several species with minimal impact, but eventually, the loss of critical (keystone) species leads to exponential degradation and sudden collapse, not a linear decline.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement (C) is incorrect. Quick Tip: Biological relationships involving complex systems are rarely perfectly linear. Look out for words like "linear" in ecological relationship statements; they are often the trap.


Question 57:

Two different amino acids are never encoded by the same codon, this character of genetic code is called ________.

  • (A) commaless
  • (B) degeneracy
  • (C) non-ambiguous
  • (D) non-overlapping
Correct Answer: (C) non-ambiguous
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The genetic code is the set of rules used by living cells to translate information encoded within genetic material into proteins, and it possesses several defining salient features.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Differentiate between the definitions of "degeneracy" and "non-ambiguous" as they apply to the genetic code.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Non-ambiguous (and specific): This property dictates that one specific codon codes for only one specific amino acid. For instance, the codon UUU strictly codes for Phenylalanine and will never code for Leucine or any other amino acid.

- Degeneracy: This is the opposite perspective; some amino acids are coded by more than one codon (e.g., Leucine is coded by six different codons).

- Commaless: The code is read continuously without any punctuation marks between codons.

- Non-overlapping: The reading frame advances three nucleotides at a time, so a single nucleotide is part of only one codon.

The question describes the one-to-one strictness of a codon, which is the non-ambiguous nature.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The character described is non-ambiguous. Quick Tip: Do not confuse Degeneracy with Non-ambiguous. Degeneracy: 1 Amino Acid \(\leftarrow\) Many Codons. Non-ambiguous: 1 Codon \(\rightarrow\) strictly 1 Amino Acid.


Question 58:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - Root hair is composed of two layers.

Statement II - Outer layer of root hair cell wall is composed of cellulose and inner layer is made up of pectin.

In light of above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Root hairs are unicellular, tubular extensions of the epidermal cells of the root, specially adapted to maximize the absorption of water and minerals from the soil.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Recall the specific biochemical layering of the cell wall in root hair cells.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Statement I: The cell wall of a root hair is structurally described as having two distinct layers, allowing it to function effectively in the soil environment. Thus, this statement is correct.

Statement II: The composition described in this statement is reversed. The outer layer of the root hair cell wall is composed of pectin. Pectin is hydrophilic and dissolves slightly in water to make the root hair sticky, enabling it to adhere tightly to soil particles. The inner layer is made up of cellulose, which provides structural rigidity. Therefore, Statement II is incorrect.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement I is correct, but Statement II is incorrect. Quick Tip: Remember the arrangement: \textbf{P}ectin is outside (it \textbf{P}astes the root to the soil), and \textbf{C}ellulose is inside (providing the structural \textbf{C}ore).


Question 59:

The fully developed foetus gives signals for uterine contractions by secreting ________ hormones.

  • (A) Oxytocin and ACTH
  • (B) Oxytocin and corticosteroids
  • (C) ACTH and prostaglandins
  • (D) ACTH and corticosteroids
Correct Answer: (D) ACTH and corticosteroids
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Parturition (childbirth) is initiated by a complex neuroendocrine cascade known as the foetal ejection reflex, which is triggered by signals originating from the fully developed foetus itself.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Trace the sequence of hormonal events that start from the foetus and eventually lead to maternal uterine contractions.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

As the foetus reaches full term, it experiences physical stress due to space constraints, activating its hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis. The foetal pituitary gland secretes ACTH (Adrenocorticotropic Hormone). This ACTH stimulates the foetal adrenal glands to secrete large amounts of corticosteroids (like cortisol).
These foetal corticosteroids diffuse across the placenta into the mother's blood, causing a critical drop in maternal progesterone and a rise in estrogen. This shift makes the maternal myometrium highly sensitive to oxytocin, effectively initiating labor. Therefore, the initiating foetal signals are ACTH and corticosteroids. (Oxytocin comes primarily from the maternal pituitary later in the cycle).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The foetus secretes ACTH and corticosteroids. Quick Tip: The initial trigger is foetal stress: Foetal ACTH \(\rightarrow\) Foetal Corticosteroids. Maternal oxytocin steps in afterwards to sustain and amplify the contractions.


Question 60:

Just before fertilization, the angiosperm's embryo sac contains ________ and ________ nuclei.

  • (A) six haploid, one diploid
  • (B) five haploid, two diploid
  • (C) six diploid, one haploid
  • (D) seven haploid, one diploid
Correct Answer: (A) six haploid, one diploid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A typical mature female gametophyte (embryo sac) in angiosperms is initially 7-celled and 8-nucleate, consisting entirely of haploid nuclei resulting from megaspore mitoses.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Track the changes in nuclear ploidy that occur in the central cell immediately prior to the entry of the pollen tube.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Initially, the embryo sac contains 8 haploid nuclei distributed across 7 cells:
1. Three Antipodal cells (3 haploid nuclei)
2. One Egg cell (1 haploid nucleus)
3. Two Synergid cells (2 haploid nuclei)
4. One large Central cell (containing 2 haploid polar nuclei)

Just before fertilization, a critical event occurs: the two haploid polar nuclei situated in the central cell fuse together. This fusion creates a single secondary nucleus, which is now diploid (2n).
At this exact moment, the composition becomes:
- 3 antipodal (haploid) + 1 egg (haploid) + 2 synergids (haploid) = 6 haploid nuclei.
- 1 secondary nucleus = 1 diploid nucleus.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The embryo sac contains six haploid nuclei and one diploid nucleus. Quick Tip: Pay strict attention to the timeline "just before fertilization". The fusion of polar nuclei into the definitive secondary nucleus alters the count from 8 haploid nuclei to 6 haploid + 1 diploid.


Question 61:

Just before fertilization, the angiosperm's embryo sac contains ________ and ________ nuclei.

  • (A) six haploid, one diploid
  • (B) five haploid, two diploid
  • (C) six diploid, one haploid
  • (D) seven haploid, one diploid
Correct Answer: (A) six haploid, one diploid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A typical mature female gametophyte (embryo sac) in angiosperms is initially 7-celled and 8-nucleate, consisting entirely of haploid nuclei resulting from megaspore mitoses.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Track the changes in nuclear ploidy that occur in the central cell immediately prior to the entry of the pollen tube.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Initially, the embryo sac contains 8 haploid nuclei distributed across 7 cells:
1. Three Antipodal cells (3 haploid nuclei)
2. One Egg cell (1 haploid nucleus)
3. Two Synergid cells (2 haploid nuclei)
4. One large Central cell (containing 2 haploid polar nuclei)

Just before fertilization, a critical event occurs: the two haploid polar nuclei situated in the central cell fuse together. This fusion creates a single secondary nucleus, which is now diploid (2n).
At this exact moment, the composition becomes:
- 3 antipodal (haploid) + 1 egg (haploid) + 2 synergids (haploid) = 6 haploid nuclei.
- 1 secondary nucleus = 1 diploid nucleus.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The embryo sac contains six haploid nuclei and one diploid nucleus. Quick Tip: Pay strict attention to the timeline "just before fertilization". The fusion of polar nuclei into the definitive secondary nucleus alters the count from 8 haploid nuclei to 6 haploid + 1 diploid.


Question 62:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - An ecosystem is a self regulatory and self sustaining structural and functional unit of nature.

Statement II - Entire biosphere can be considered as one global ecosystem.

In light of above statements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

An ecosystem represents the complex interaction between living organisms (biotic community) and their physical environment (abiotic components) within a given area.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Analyze both statements based on fundamental ecological definitions provided in standard biology literature.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Statement I: This is the exact fundamental definition of an ecosystem. It is an organized functional unit of nature where living organisms interact among themselves and with the surrounding physical environment, capable of self-regulation through continuous nutrient cycling and energy flow.

Statement II: Because all local ecosystems on Earth are interconnected by large-scale processes (e.g., global water cycles, carbon cycles, atmospheric circulation, and migrating species), the entire biosphere of Earth can be holistically viewed as a single, massive, integrated "global ecosystem." This is a standard concept taught in ecology.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both statements are factually correct and represent standard ecological principles. Quick Tip: The specific phrases "structural and functional unit" and "global ecosystem" are key textbook definitions. Whenever you see them describing ecosystems and the biosphere respectively, the statements are almost certainly correct.


Question 63:

The number of reduced coenzymes \(NADH + H^{+}\) formed during complete oxidation of one molecule of glucose.

  • (A) \(2\)
  • (B) \(8\)
  • (C) \(10\)
  • (D) \(12\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(10\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

During aerobic respiration, glucose is systematically broken down and completely oxidized to \(CO_{2}\) and \(H_{2}O\). During this oxidative breakdown, electron carrier molecules like \(NAD^{+}\) are reduced to form \(NADH + H^{+}\).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Sum the \(NADH\) molecules produced in each of the three main stages of cellular respiration per molecule of glucose.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's meticulously trace the formation of \(NADH\) for \(1\) molecule of glucose:
1. Glycolysis: The conversion of 2 molecules of PGAL to 2 molecules of 1,3-bisphosphoglyceric acid yields \(\mathbf{2 NADH}\).
2. Link Reaction (Oxidative Decarboxylation): 1 glucose molecule yields 2 pyruvate molecules. The conversion of these 2 Pyruvates into 2 Acetyl CoA molecules yields \(\mathbf{2 NADH}\).
3. TCA Cycle (Krebs Cycle): Each Acetyl CoA entering the cycle produces \(3 NADH\). Since 2 Acetyl CoA molecules enter the cycle per glucose molecule, the yield is \(2 \times 3 = \mathbf{6 NADH}\).

Total \(NADH\) formed = \(2 (Glycolysis) + 2 (Link Reaction) + 6 (TCA Cycle) = 10 NADH\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The total is 10 reduced NADH coenzymes. Quick Tip: Do not confuse \(NADH\) with total reduced coenzymes generally. The total reduced coenzymes formed are \(10 NADH\) and \(2 FADH_{2}\) per single glucose molecule.


Question 64:

Monohybrid crosses are useful in demonstrating which of the following laws of inheritance suggested by Mendel?

  • (A) Law of dominance and law of independent assortment.
  • (B) Law of segregation and law of independent assortment.
  • (C) Law of purity of gamete and law of dominance.
  • (D) Law of independent assortment only.
Correct Answer: (C) Law of purity of gamete and law of dominance.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A monohybrid cross is a mating experiment between two organisms that are identically hybrid for a single specific trait (one gene).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Determine the requirements for each of Mendel's laws and see which ones can be proven by tracking only a single character.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Law of Dominance: This is demonstrated in the F1 generation of a monohybrid cross, where only one allele (the dominant one) expresses itself phenotypically when two pure lines are crossed.

- Law of Segregation (also known as the Law of Purity of Gametes): This is demonstrated by the reappearance of the recessive trait in the F2 generation. It states that the two alleles for a trait segregate independently during gamete formation, ensuring each gamete receives only one "pure" allele.

- Law of Independent Assortment: This law explains how two or more different traits are inherited independently of each other. Therefore, it mathematically and logically requires a dihybrid cross (or higher) to be demonstrated. It cannot be shown with a monohybrid cross.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Monohybrid crosses demonstrate the laws of dominance and purity of gametes. Quick Tip: Remember the rule of traits: Monohybrid (1 character) = Demonstrates Dominance \& Segregation. Dihybrid (2 characters) = Demonstrates Independent Assortment.


Question 65:

Enzymes are needed only in small quantities to catalyse reactions because

  • (A) they act very fast.
  • (B) they remain unchanged at the end of the reaction.
  • (C) they are made up to proteins.
  • (D) they are temperature and pH sensitive.
Correct Answer: (B) they remain unchanged at the end of the reaction.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Enzymes act as highly specific biological catalysts that significantly accelerate biochemical reactions.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the defining chemical property of any catalyst regarding its structural integrity during a chemical reaction.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Enzymes speed up chemical reactions by lowering the necessary activation energy. However, the most critical feature of a catalyst is that it is not consumed or permanently altered in the overall reaction process. Once a product is formed and released from the enzyme's active site, the enzyme immediately returns to its original state, completely free and ready to bind to another substrate molecule. Because a single enzyme molecule can continuously catalyze the same reaction thousands of times per second (high turnover number), only a minute concentration of the enzyme is required to convert a massive amount of substrate into product.

Step 4: Final Answer:

They remain unchanged at the end of the reaction, allowing continuous reuse. Quick Tip: The key distinguishing feature of a catalyst is its reusability (turnover number). This is precisely why biochemical pathways do not exhaust their enzyme supplies quickly.


Question 66:

The number of amino groups in the amino acids present in amides is ________

  • (A) one
  • (B) two
  • (C) three
  • (D) four
Correct Answer: (B) two
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In plant physiology, important amides like asparagine and glutamine serve as major structural components of proteins and are the preferred molecules for transporting nitrogen through xylem vessels.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Analyze the chemical transformation that occurs when standard acidic amino acids are converted into amides.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

These plant amides are derived from the acidic amino acids, namely aspartic acid and glutamic acid. The biochemical conversion involves the addition of another amino radical. Specifically, the hydroxyl (\(OH^{-}\)) part of the acid's side-chain carboxyl group (\(COOH\)) is replaced by another amino group (\(NH_{2}\)).
Therefore, while a standard, simple amino acid has exactly one \(\alpha\)-amino group, an amide derived from it (like asparagine) effectively contains two nitrogenous groups: the original \(\alpha\)-amino group and the newly added amide group (which biological texts often classify as a second amino radical for nitrogen counting purposes). This high nitrogen-to-carbon ratio makes them ideal for safe nitrogen transport.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Amides have two amino-related groups. Quick Tip: According to standard botanical texts (like NCERT), amides contain more nitrogen than regular amino acids because the hydroxyl part of the acid is replaced by an extra "amino radical". Therefore, always count them as having 2 amino groups.


Question 67:

Which of the following are the initial and final steps during the process of ecological succession?

  • (A) Nudation and Aggregation
  • (B) Invasion and Competition
  • (C) Competition and co-action
  • (D) Nudation and Stabilization
Correct Answer: (D) Nudation and Stabilization
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ecological succession is the gradual, sequential, and predictable change in the species composition of a given area over time. Frederic E. Clements outlined the formal sequential steps involved in this ecological process.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Recall the exact chronological sequence of the Clementsian model of primary succession.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The major, universally recognized sequential steps of primary succession are:
1. Nudation: The development of a completely bare, previously uninhabited area (the absolute first step).
2. Invasion: The successful establishment of a pioneer species in the bare area.
3. Competition and Co-action: As pioneer species multiply, they begin to compete for limited space and resources.
4. Reaction: The physical environment is significantly modified by the living organisms present.
5. Stabilization (Climax): The ultimate final stage where a mature, stable, and self-perpetuating community is established in perfect equilibrium with the environment.

Thus, the initial step is Nudation, and the final step is Stabilization.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct pair is Nudation and Stabilization. Quick Tip: Memorize the Clementsian succession sequence using the acronym: \textbf{N-I-C-R-S} (Nudation, Invasion, Competition, Reaction, Stabilization).


Question 68:

Match column I with column II and select the correct option

  • (A) i-d ii-a iii-b iv-c
  • (B) i-d ii-a iii-c iv-b
  • (C) i-b ii-c iii-d iv-a
  • (D) i-b ii-c iii-a iv-d
Correct Answer: (C) i-b ii-c iii-d iv-a
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Biofortification is the selective breeding of crops to significantly increase their nutritional value (vitamins, minerals, proteins). The Indian Agricultural Research Institute (IARI) has released several successful biofortified varieties.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Match the specific crops with their correspondingly enhanced nutrients as detailed in agricultural science curricula. Address any typographical errors in the table by looking at the logical sequence of the options.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's match the crops with their fortified nutrients:
- Carrot and spinach (i): IARI successfully released varieties heavily enriched with Vitamin A (carrot, spinach, pumpkin) and essential minerals like Iron and Calcium (spinach). Thus, i matches b.
- Bitter gourd (ii): Specifically enriched with Vitamin C. Thus, ii matches c.
- Maize (iii): In 2000, biofortified maize hybrids were developed that contain roughly twice the amount of the essential amino acids lysine and tryptophan compared to existing hybrids. Thus, iii matches d (noting the typo in the provided table where 'd' is written as a second 'c').
- Wheat Atlas-66 (iv): This is a famous, well-documented wheat variety boasting a significantly high protein content, used extensively as a donor plant for improving cultivated wheat worldwide. Thus, iv matches a.

This gives the definitive sequence: i-b, ii-c, iii-d, iv-a.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (C) provides the correct matches. Quick Tip: Always firmly associate "Atlas 66" with high protein wheat, and "Maize hybrids" with essential amino acids (Lysine/Tryptophan). Knowing just these two often allows you to solve the entire matching matrix.


Question 69:

Hypersecretion of glucocorticoid leads to________

  • (A) Cushing's disease
  • (B) Addison's disease
  • (C) Grave's disease
  • (D) Bleeders' disease
Correct Answer: (A) Cushing's disease
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Glucocorticoids (such as cortisol) are vital steroid hormones produced by the adrenal cortex. Abnormal secretion levels lead to distinct clinical endocrine syndromes.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Differentiate between the diseases caused by the hypersecretion (excess) versus the hyposecretion (deficiency) of adrenal hormones.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Cushing's disease/syndrome: This condition is caused by the prolonged hypersecretion (excessive production) of cortisol. Typical clinical symptoms include severe central obesity, a characteristic "moon face," high blood sugar, and hypertension.

- Addison's disease: This condition is caused by the hyposecretion (deficiency) of adrenal cortex hormones, which includes both glucocorticoids and mineralocorticoids.

- Grave's disease: This is an autoimmune disorder that causes hyperthyroidism (an excess of thyroid hormones), not adrenal hormones.

- Bleeders' disease: This is a common historical term for Hemophilia, which is a genetic blood clotting disorder completely unrelated to hormones.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Hypersecretion causes Cushing's disease. Quick Tip: Use this mnemonic: \textbf{Add}ison's means you need to \textbf{Add} more hormones (it's a Hyposecretion). Cushing's provides a "cushion" of excess fat and hormones (it's a Hypersecretion).


Question 70:

The restriction enzymes used as molecular scissors are type of ________

  • (A) ligases
  • (B) nucleases
  • (C) protease
  • (D) carboxylases
Correct Answer: (B) nucleases
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Restriction enzymes (restriction endonucleases) are the foundational tools in recombinant DNA technology, functioning to accurately cut DNA at specific palindromic recognition sequences.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Classify restriction enzymes into their broader biochemical family based on the specific type of chemical bond they target and break.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Because restriction enzymes function by cleaving the phosphodiester bonds of nucleic acids (specifically the backbone of DNA), they belong to the larger, overarching class of enzymes known as nucleases.
- Ligases perform the exact opposite function; they join DNA fragments together by forming phosphodiester bonds.
- Proteases break down proteins by cleaving peptide bonds.
- Carboxylases are enzymes that add carboxyl groups to various substrates.

Nucleases are further formally divided into exonucleases (which cut nucleotides from the ends) and endonucleases (which cut within the DNA chain). Restriction enzymes are a highly specific type of endonuclease.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Restriction enzymes belong to the nuclease family. Quick Tip: Remember the enzyme suffixes: "-nuclease" refers strictly to enzymes acting on Nucleic acids. Ligases act as the "molecular glue", while nucleases act as the "molecular scissors".


Question 71:

Given below are two statements.

Statement I - Calotropis growing in abandoned fields is never consumed by cattle and goats.

Statement II - Calotropis produces highly poisonous cardiac glycosides.

In light of above statements, select the most appropriate answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Plants have evolved a myriad of complex morphological and chemical defense mechanisms to deter herbivores and ensure their own survival.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Evaluate the factual accuracy of the field observation (Statement I) and the underlying biochemical reason for it (Statement II).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Statement I: This is a highly accurate direct field observation commonly cited in ecology textbooks. Browsing animals, such as cattle and goats, instinctively avoid eating the Calotropis weed, allowing it to flourish in abandoned fields.

Statement II: This provides the exact biological and evolutionary reason for the avoidance described in Statement I. \textit{Calotropis successfully defends itself by synthesizing highly toxic secondary metabolites known as cardiac glycosides. These potent chemicals interfere with the sodium-potassium pumps in heart tissue, causing severe disruption of heart rhythms, which can be fatal to herbivores.

Because the plant produces this potent toxin, herbivores have evolutionarily learned to avoid it entirely. Therefore, both statements are factually correct, and Statement II logically explains Statement I.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both statements are correct. Quick Tip: Chemical defenses are highly effective evolutionary adaptations. Always pair: \textit{Calotropis \(\rightarrow\) Cardiac glycosides. Nicotiana \(\rightarrow\) Nicotine. Cinchona \(\rightarrow\) Quinine.


Question 72:

Phenotypically tall plants can be obtained from genetically dwarf maize plants by application of ________

  • (A) Gibberellins
  • (B) Auxins
  • (C) Ethylene
  • (D) ABA
Correct Answer: (A) Gibberellins
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Plant growth regulators (phytohormones) mediate almost all growth processes. Genetic dwarfism in certain crop plants is frequently caused by a specific mutation that blocks the natural internal synthesis of essential growth hormones.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the specific plant hormone that is classically used in agricultural bioassays to reverse genetic dwarfism through internodal elongation.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Genetically dwarf varieties of plants, such as certain strains of maize and peas (which exhibit a rosette habit), are typically deficient in endogenous gibberellins due to genetic mutations. When exogenous Gibberellic Acid (GA) is sprayed or applied to these plants, it dramatically stimulates internodal elongation, causing the plants to grow rapidly to a normal, phenotypically tall height. This dramatic reversal of genetic dwarfism is a classic physiological effect and bioassay specific to gibberellins. While Auxins also promote general cellular growth, they do not primarily reverse genetic dwarfism in intact plants in this highly dramatic and specific manner.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Application of Gibberellins reverses the dwarf phenotype. Quick Tip: The dramatic reversal of genetic dwarfism and 'bolting' (the sudden massive elongation of internodes prior to flowering in rosette plants like cabbage) are the trademark, highly testable functions of Gibberellins.


Question 73:

Islets of Langerhans are ________ .

  • (A) groups of endocrine cells of pancreas
  • (B) group of cells in the stroma of thyroid gland
  • (C) star shaped glial cells of CNS
  • (D) grey masses within the white matter of nervous system
Correct Answer: (A) groups of endocrine cells of pancreas
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The pancreas is uniquely classified as a composite (or heterocrine) gland, meaning it structurally acts as both an exocrine gland (for digestion) and an endocrine gland (for hormone regulation).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the specific anatomical location and functional role of the cellular structures known as the Islets of Langerhans.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The endocrine portion of the pancreas is not a single solid mass but consists of isolated microscopic clusters of cells scattered throughout the organ. These clusters are called the Islets of Langerhans. There are approximately 1 to 2 million Islets of Langerhans in a normal human pancreas, representing only about 1 to 2 percent of the total pancreatic tissue mass. These highly vascularized islets contain specific cells (primarily alpha cells and beta cells) that secrete crucial hormones like glucagon and insulin directly into the bloodstream to regulate blood sugar levels.

Step 4: Final Answer:

They are groups of endocrine cells located in the pancreas. Quick Tip: Remember the division: Exocrine pancreas = Acini (which secrete digestive enzymes into ducts). Endocrine pancreas = Islets of Langerhans (which secrete insulin/glucagon directly into blood).


Question 74:

Homo sapiens are most closely related to________

  • (A) Lemurs
  • (B) Tarsiers
  • (C) Baboons
  • (D) Orangutan
Correct Answer: (D) Orangutan
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Primate phylogeny categorizes humans (\textit{Homo sapiens) along with various apes, monkeys, and prosimians based on their evolutionary proximity and shared common ancestors.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Rank the given primate groups based on their accepted evolutionary closeness to the hominid lineage.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Humans belong to the biological family Hominidae (the great apes). Let's evaluate the choices provided:
- Lemurs and Tarsiers are prosimians. They branched off extremely early in primate evolutionary history and are therefore the most distantly related to humans on this list.
- Baboons are Old World monkeys (Family Cercopithecidae). They are closer to us than prosimians but are still phylogenetically distinct from all apes.
- Orangutans belong directly to the same family as humans (Hominidae), making them "great apes". While chimpanzees and bonobos are our absolute closest living relatives overall, among the specific options provided in this question, the orangutan represents the closest relative to \textit{Homo sapiens.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The Orangutan is the closest relative among the choices. Quick Tip: Keep this hierarchy of evolutionary closeness to humans in mind: Great Apes (Chimp \(>\) Gorilla \(>\) Orangutan) \(>\) Lesser Apes (Gibbons) \(>\) Old World Monkeys (Baboons, Macaques) \(>\) New World Monkeys \(>\) Prosimians (Lemurs, Tarsiers).


Question 75:

Complete the analogy with respect to reproductive system.

Male : Penis :: Female : ________ .

  • (A) Vagina
  • (B) Vulva
  • (C) Clitoris
  • (D) Cervix
Correct Answer: (C) Clitoris
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Analogies in human reproductive anatomy typically rely on strict embryological homology (meaning the structures develop from the exact same embryonic tissues) rather than just functional copulatory counterparts.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the female organ that shares its embryonic origin and structural tissue composition with the male penis.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Both the male penis and the female clitoris develop embryologically from the exact same precursor structure called the genital tubercle. Furthermore, they share highly similar structural features; most notably, both are composed of highly sensitive erectile tissues (the corpus cavernosum). The clitoris is functionally and anatomically homologous to the glans penis in males. While the vagina is the copulatory receptacle corresponding functionally to the penis during coitus, biological anatomy questions almost exclusively prioritize developmental and structural homology when drawing direct analogies.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The homologous structure to the penis is the clitoris. Quick Tip: Memorize these key homologous structures: Penis \(\leftrightarrow\) Clitoris; Scrotum \(\leftrightarrow\) Labia majora; Bulbourethral (Cowper's) glands \(\leftrightarrow\) Bartholin's glands.


Question 76:

In a male gametophyte, ploidy of tube cell and a male gamete is ________

  • (A) both are haploid
  • (B) both are diploid
  • (C) tube cell is haploid and male gamete is diploid
  • (D) tube cell is diploid and male gamete is haploid
Correct Answer: (A) both are haploid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The male gametophyte (the pollen grain) in angiosperms develops entirely from a microspore formed exclusively by meiosis.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Trace the ploidy level starting from the microspore mother cell through all subsequent meiotic and mitotic divisions.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The microspore mother cell (2n) in the anther undergoes meiosis to produce four haploid (n) microspores. Each individual microspore develops into a mature pollen grain (the male gametophyte).
The single haploid nucleus of the microspore undergoes an asymmetric mitotic division to form two distinct cells: a larger vegetative cell (also called the tube cell) and a smaller generative cell. Since this division is mitotic and strictly originates from a haploid cell, both resulting cells are undeniably haploid. Later, the generative cell divides mitotically once more to form two male gametes, which are consequently also haploid. Therefore, every single nucleus within the male gametophyte generation is haploid (n).

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both the tube cell and the male gamete are haploid. Quick Tip: As an absolute rule in plant biology: Any cell belonging to the gametophyte generation (which includes the entire pollen grain, the embryo sac, and all their internal cells) is strictly haploid (n), as they are post-meiotic structures.


Question 77:

In which of the following, bilirubin is excreted in urine?

  • (A) Marasmus
  • (B) Kwashiorkor
  • (C) Jaundice
  • (D) Indigestion
Correct Answer: (C) Jaundice
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Bilirubin is a toxic, yellow pigment formed naturally from the breakdown of hemoglobin in old red blood cells. Normally, it is processed efficiently by the liver and excreted into the digestive tract via bile.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Relate the abnormal physiological buildup and alternative excretion pathways of bilirubin to the clinical symptoms of the given diseases.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Jaundice (also known as icterus) is a medical condition characterized prominently by the yellowing of the skin, mucous membranes, and the sclera (whites) of the eyes. This phenomenon occurs when there is an abnormal, massive accumulation of bilirubin in the blood (hyperbilirubinemia). This can be due to severe liver damage, bile duct obstruction, or excessive RBC destruction. Because the blood levels become so excessively high, the water-soluble conjugated form of bilirubin is eventually filtered by the kidneys and excreted, giving the patient's urine a characteristic dark, tea-like color.
In contrast, Marasmus and Kwashiorkor are strictly protein-energy malnutrition disorders, and Indigestion is a general stomach upset, none of which primarily involve bilirubin pathways.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Bilirubin is excreted in urine during Jaundice. Quick Tip: Dark urine and pale stools are classic clinical hallmark signs alongside yellow skin in liver-related jaundice due to completely altered bilirubin excretion pathways.


Question 78:

The only 5C intermediate formed during reactions of TCA cycle is ________

  • (A) Oxalosuccinic acid
  • (B) \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate
  • (C) Succinyl CoA
  • (D) Cis - Aconitate
Correct Answer: (B) \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The Tricarboxylic Acid (TCA) cycle, or Krebs cycle, involves a series of enzymatic reactions where carbon molecules are progressively oxidized and decarboxylated.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Trace the exact carbon count of the intermediate molecules starting from the 6-carbon Citrate down to the 4-carbon Oxaloacetate.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Citrate, Isocitrate, Cis-Aconitate, and Oxalosuccinic acid are all 6-carbon (6C) compounds.
- Oxalosuccinic acid undergoes an oxidative decarboxylation reaction (losing one molecule of \(CO_{2}\)) to form \(\alpha\)-ketoglutaric acid (or \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate). Since it lost one carbon, it becomes a 5-carbon (5C) compound.
- \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate then undergoes another decarboxylation to form Succinyl CoA, which is a 4-carbon (4C) compound. All subsequent intermediates in the cycle (Succinate, Fumarate, Malate, Oxaloacetate) are 4C.
Therefore, \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate is the unique and only 5-carbon intermediate in the entire cycle.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The only 5C intermediate is \(\alpha\)-ketoglutarate. Quick Tip: Remember the carbon count transition points where \(CO_2\) is lost: Citrate (6C) \(\rightarrow\) \(\alpha\)-Ketoglutarate (5C) \(\rightarrow\) Succinyl CoA (4C).


Question 79:

Secondary metabolites like glucosinolates are produced by cabbage to

  • (A) protect it from many pests
  • (B) attracts insects for pollination
  • (C) kills weeds around it
  • (D) improve soil fertilization
Correct Answer: (A) protect it from many pests
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Secondary metabolites are organic compounds produced by plants that, unlike primary metabolites, are not directly involved in the normal growth, development, or reproduction of the organism. Their primary role is ecological interaction.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the primary evolutionary and ecological function of toxic secondary metabolites like glucosinolates in the Brassicaceae family.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Because plants are stationary and cannot flee from herbivores, they have evolved a sophisticated array of chemical defenses. Glucosinolates are a class of pungent, sulfur-containing secondary metabolites found predominantly in plants like cabbage, mustard, and horseradish. When plant tissue is chewed and damaged by a pest, these compounds are enzymatically broken down into highly toxic and deterrent products (like isothiocyanates). This chemical response actively deters herbivores and protects the plant from being eaten.

Step 4: Final Answer:

They are produced to protect the plant from many pests. Quick Tip: The vast majority of secondary metabolites mentioned in standard ecology (alkaloids, tannins, cardiac glycosides, glucosinolates) act primarily as chemical defenses against herbivores and pathogens.


Question 80:

Tubular fluid tends to become acidic in the________ of nephron.

  • (A) PCT
  • (B) DCT
  • (C) neck
  • (D) Henle's loop
Correct Answer: (B) DCT
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The nephron plays a critical role in maintaining the acid-base balance of the blood by selectively secreting hydrogen ions (\(H^{+}\)) and reabsorbing bicarbonate ions (\(HCO_{3}^{-}\)).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Determine which segment of the nephron is responsible for the final acidification of the urine compared to the blood plasma.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

While the Proximal Convoluted Tubule (PCT) actively secretes a large volume of \(H^{+}\) into the lumen, the vast majority of these protons are immediately used to titrate and reabsorb filtered bicarbonate. Consequently, the pH of the tubular fluid in the PCT does not drop drastically.
The Distal Convoluted Tubule (DCT) and the subsequent Collecting Duct are the primary sites where the final, definitive acidification of urine occurs. In the late DCT and collecting duct, specialized intercalated cells actively pump \(H^{+}\) against a steep concentration gradient directly into the tubular fluid, significantly lowering its pH and making it decidedly acidic.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The fluid tends to become definitively acidic in the DCT. Quick Tip: While both PCT and DCT secrete \(H^{+}\), the net acidification that results in the typically low, acidic pH of final excreted urine primarily occurs in the late DCT and collecting duct.


Question 81:

All are events of pollen-pistil interaction EXCEPT

  • (A) absorption of water and nutrients from the stigmatic surface.
  • (B) first division of pollen grain.
  • (C) deposition of pollen grain on stigma.
  • (D) germination of pollen grains to produce pollen tube.
Correct Answer: (B) first division of pollen grain.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Pollen-pistil interaction is a dynamic sequence of events that encompasses everything from the initial landing of the pollen on the stigma until the pollen tube successfully enters the ovule.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Separate the developmental events that occur prior to pollination (microgametogenesis inside the anther) from the events that occur after the pollen lands on the stigma.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Deposition (C): The interaction physically begins when the pollen grain lands on the stigma.
- Absorption (A): Compatible pollen recognizes the stigma and absorbs water and specific nutrients from the stigmatic surface to hydrate.
- Germination (D): Successful hydration leads to the germination of the pollen tube through one of the germ pores.
- First division of pollen grain (B): The first mitotic division of the microspore (which forms the vegetative and generative cells) occurs before the pollen is ever shed from the anther, while it is still enclosed inside the microsporangium. Therefore, this developmental division is an event of microgametogenesis prior to pollination, and is absolutely not a part of pollen-pistil interaction.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The first division of the pollen grain is the exception. Quick Tip: Pollen is typically shed at the 2-celled or 3-celled stage. Therefore, the first mitotic division must happen inside the anther, long before the pollen grain ever touches a stigma.


Question 82:

Which one of the following cells secrete heparin, histamine and serotonin?

  • (A) Lymphocytes
  • (B) Basophils
  • (C) Eosinophils
  • (D) Thrombocytes
Correct Answer: (B) Basophils
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Different types of leukocytes (white blood cells) are distinguished by their specific granular contents and their specific roles in the immune response.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Recall the specific biochemicals stored and secreted by the different types of granulocytes, particularly focusing on inflammatory mediators.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Basophils are the least common type of circulating granulocytes (accounting for only 0.5-1% of WBCs). They are characterized by large cytoplasmic granules that store and release several important vasoactive mediators. Principally, these granules secrete histamine (a potent vasodilator), serotonin (a neurotransmitter and vasoconstrictor in certain contexts), and heparin (a strong anticoagulant). These chemicals are heavily involved in mediating inflammatory responses and allergic reactions. Tissue mast cells are functionally very similar and secrete these same substances.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Basophils secrete heparin, histamine, and serotonin. Quick Tip: Always associate Basophils with Allergic and Inflammatory responses specifically due to their triad of secretions: Heparin, Histamine, and Serotonin.


Question 83:

In an antibody, disulphide bonds are present________

i. between two heavy chains

ii. between two light chains

iii. between the constant region of light chain and the constant region of a heavy chain

iv. between antigen binding sites of both the heavy and light chains

v. between the variable region of light chain and that of heavy chain

Select the correct answer from the options given below

  • (A) i and ii only
  • (B) i and iii only
  • (C) ii and v only
  • (D) ii and iv only
Correct Answer: (B) i and iii only
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

An antibody (immunoglobulin) is a complex Y-shaped protein consisting of four polypeptide chains: two identical Heavy (H) chains and two identical Light (L) chains, which are structurally held together by specific covalent disulfide bonds.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Map the exact structural locations of the inter-chain disulfide bonds in the classic \(H_{2}L_{2}\) antibody structure.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's analyze the structural statements:
- i. between two heavy chains: Correct. The two heavy chains are linked together by interchain disulfide bonds located in the flexible hinge region, holding the two halves of the "Y" together.
- ii. between two light chains: Incorrect. Light chains are located on the far outer sides of the Y-arms and do not touch or bond to each other.
- iii. between the constant region of light chain and the constant region of a heavy chain: Correct. Each light chain is covalently linked to its corresponding heavy chain via a single interchain disulfide bond, typically located between their constant domains (\(C_{L}\) and \(C_{H}1\)).
- iv \& v. between antigen binding sites/variable regions: Incorrect. The variable regions of the heavy and light chains associate via non-covalent interactions to perfectly form the 3D antigen-binding site. There are no disulfide bonds covalently holding these specific regions together across different chains.

Therefore, statements i and iii accurately describe the locations of interchain disulfide bonds.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (B) containing statements i and iii is correct. Quick Tip: Remember the general structural formula: \(H_{2}L_{2}\). Disulfide bonds structurally connect Heavy to Heavy (\(H-H\)) and Heavy to Light (\(H-L\)). They absolutely do not connect Light to Light.


Question 84:

The water which percolates deep in the soil is ________

  • (A) Gravitational water
  • (B) Capillary water
  • (C) Combined water
  • (D) Hygroscopic water
Correct Answer: (A) Gravitational water
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Soil water is biologically categorized based on exactly how it is physically held within the soil matrix and its subsequent availability for absorption by plant roots.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Match the physical behavior of water moving deep into the soil profile with the correct hydrological term.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Gravitational water: After heavy rain or irrigation, the free-flowing water that percolates rapidly downwards through the larger soil macropores under the direct influence of gravity, eventually reaching the deeper water table, is called gravitational water. This is generally unavailable to plant roots because it drains away too quickly from the root zone.
- Capillary water: This is water held in the micro-pores of the soil against the pull of gravity by capillary forces. This is the primary and most important source of water available to plants.
- Hygroscopic water: A microscopically thin film of water tightly bound to individual soil particles by strong adhesive forces, making it entirely unavailable to plants.
- Combined water: Water that is chemically bound within the actual molecular crystalline structure of soil minerals.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Water that percolates deep due to gravity is Gravitational water. Quick Tip: The phrase "percolates deep" strongly implies moving downwards freely through the soil profile, a movement completely driven by gravity. Hence, it refers to Gravitational water. Capillary water, in contrast, stays suspended up in the root zone.


Question 85:

Select INCORRECT statements with respects transport of \(CO_{2}\) by RBCs and plasma.

i. \(23%\) of \(CO_{2}\) released from tissue cells diffuse into plasma first and then into RBCs.

ii. Within RBCs carbonic acid immediately dissociates into \(H^{+}\) and \(HCO_{3}^{-}\).

iii. In RBCs \(CO_{2}\) combines with \(H_{2}O\) to form carbonic acid.

iv. \(H^{+}\) ions move out of RBCs and combine with \(Na^{+}\) to form \(NaHCO_{3}\).

v. \(7%\) of \(CO_{2}\) is transported in dissolved form as carbonic acid in plasma.

In the light of above statements choose the correct answer from option given below.

  • (A) i, ii and iii only
  • (B) iii, iv and v only
  • (C) ii and v only
  • (D) i and iv only
Correct Answer: (D) i and iv only
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Carbon dioxide (\(CO_{2}\)) is transported in the blood via three main mechanisms: dissolved in plasma (\(\sim\)7%), bound to hemoglobin as carbaminohemoglobin (\(\sim\)20-25%), and converted into bicarbonate ions (\(\sim\)70%).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Systematically evaluate each statement against the physiological facts and chemical equations of \(CO_{2}\) transport, specifically noting the direction of diffusion and ion movement (chloride shift).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's analyze the statements to find the incorrect ones:
- i. (Incorrect): All \(100%\) of the \(CO_{2\) released from tissue cells must diffuse into the plasma first. From that pool in the plasma, about 20-25% enters the RBCs to bind hemoglobin, and 70% enters the RBCs to become bicarbonate. Stating that only \(23%\) diffuses into the plasma first is factually incorrect.
- ii. (Correct): Carbonic acid (\(H_{2CO_{3}\)) is highly unstable at physiological pH and rapidly dissociates into \(H^{+}\) and \(HCO_{3}^{-}\).
- iii. (Correct): Inside the RBCs, the enzyme carbonic anhydrase facilitates the rapid hydration reaction: \(CO_{2} + H_{2}O \rightleftharpoons H_{2}CO_{3}\).
- iv. (Incorrect): The \(HCO_{3}^{-}\) (bicarbonate) ions move out of the RBC into the plasma (exchanged for chloride in the chloride shift) and combine with \(Na^{+\) to form \(NaHCO_{3}\). The \(H^{+}\) ions remain strictly inside the RBC and are buffered by binding directly to hemoglobin. Therefore, stating that \(H^{+\) ions move out is completely incorrect.
- v. (Correct contextually): Standard curriculum texts state that roughly 7% of \(CO_{2}\) is carried in a dissolved state in plasma. While technically it is mostly dissolved gas rather than fully formed "carbonic acid", in the context of multiple-choice elimination, statements (i) and (iv) contain glaring, definitive physiological errors. Option (D) correctly groups these two definitive errors.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statements i and iv are the incorrect statements. Quick Tip: Remember the Chloride Shift (Hamburger phenomenon) clearly: Bicarbonate (\(HCO_{3}^{-}\)) goes OUT of the RBC into the plasma, while Chloride (\(Cl^{-}\)) goes IN. Protons (\(H^{+}\)) stay securely trapped inside the RBC to bind to hemoglobin, preventing dangerous blood pH drops.


Question 86:

Dispersal of pollens is an example of

  • (A) gene mutation
  • (B) genetic drifts
  • (C) genetic recombination
  • (D) gene flow
Correct Answer: (D) gene flow
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Evolutionary forces are the mechanisms that alter allele frequencies within a population. These primary forces include mutation, genetic drift, natural selection, and gene flow.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the specific evolutionary mechanism that is strictly associated with the physical movement and introduction of alleles between geographically distinct populations.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Gene flow (often called gene migration) is defined as the physical transfer of genetic material from one population to another. In the plant kingdom, this most commonly occurs when pollen is blown by the wind or carried by insect pollinators from a plant in one population to successfully fertilize a plant in a geographically distinct population. This introduction of new alleles actively changes the gene pool of the receiving population.
In contrast, genetic drift is random statistical fluctuation; mutation is a direct chemical change in DNA; and recombination is the shuffling of genes during meiosis.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Pollen dispersal is a classic example of gene flow. Quick Tip: Pollen dispersal and seed dispersal are the two primary and most significant mechanisms of \textbf{Gene Flow} in plant populations across landscapes.


Question 87:

Given below are two statements:

Statement I - Toddy is made by fermenting fleshy pedicels of cashews nuts.

Statement II - Fenny is made by fermenting the sugar sap extracted from palm plants and coconut palm.

In light of above statements, select the correct answer from the option given below.

  • (A) Both statement I and statement II are correct.
  • (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
  • (C) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect.
  • (D) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct.
Correct Answer: (B) Both statement I and statement II are incorrect.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Traditional fermented beverages are an important part of cultural practices and utilize specific, locally available regional plant products.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Verify the specific plant sources used for the production of the traditional drinks Toddy and Fenny.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The two statements provided have their factual plant sources completely swapped:
- Toddy is a very common traditional drink found in parts of Southern India, which is correctly made by fermenting the sugary sap extracted directly from palm trees (such as coconut palms or Palmyra palms).
- Fenny (or Feni) is a famous traditional liquor originating exclusively from Goa, made primarily by fermenting the fleshy pedicels (known as cashew apples) of cashew nuts, or sometimes alternatively from coconut sap.
Therefore, Statement I wrongly describes the source of Toddy, and Statement II wrongly describes the primary source of Fenny. Both statements are factually incorrect as written.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Both statements are incorrect. Quick Tip: Associate "Toddy" directly with Palm sap (a very common drink in South India) and "Fenny" directly with Cashew apples (a geographically indicated liquor famous in Goa).


Question 88:

Which one of the following pair of hormones is NOT antagonistic?

  • (A) Calcitonin and Parathormone
  • (B) Glucagon and Insulin
  • (C) Atrial Natriuretic hormone and Aldosterone
  • (D) Oestrogen and Progesterone
Correct Answer: (D) Oestrogen and Progesterone
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Antagonistic hormones are pairs of hormones that have directly opposing physiological effects on the body, working in a push-pull mechanism to tightly maintain homeostasis.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the primary physiological effects of each hormone pair listed to determine if they oppose each other or work in a coordinated, synergistic manner.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- (A) Calcitonin lowers blood calcium levels, while Parathormone (PTH) raises them. This is a classic antagonistic pair.
- (B) Insulin lowers blood glucose levels, while Glucagon raises them. This is another classic antagonistic pair.
- (C) Aldosterone increases sodium and water reabsorption (raising blood volume and pressure), while ANF (Atrial Natriuretic Factor) promotes sodium and water excretion (lowering blood volume and pressure). This is an antagonistic pair.
- (D) Oestrogen and Progesterone generally work synergistically (cooperatively). Both are absolutely essential for preparing and maintaining the uterine endometrium for pregnancy and regulating the menstrual cycle in a coordinated sequence. While they may have minor opposing effects on specific localized tissues (like myometrial contractility), their primary systemic role in the female reproductive cycle is cooperative, not classically antagonistic.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Oestrogen and Progesterone are not an antagonistic pair. Quick Tip: Classic antagonistic pairs are almost always tied to the tight homeostatic regulation of critical blood variables (like Calcium, Glucose, or Blood Pressure). Reproductive hormones usually orchestrate a complex sequence synergistically.


Question 89:

In the processing of hnRNA in eukaryotic cell, the primary transcripts are processed in the following sequence.

  • (A) Splicing, Capping, Tailing
  • (B) Tailing, Capping, Splicing
  • (C) Splicing, Tailing, Capping
  • (D) Tailing, Splicing, Capping
Correct Answer: (A) Splicing, Capping, Tailing
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In eukaryotes, the primary transcript produced directly from DNA is called heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA). This immature RNA must undergo several crucial post-transcriptional modifications to become functional, translatable mRNA.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the specific sequence of hnRNA processing steps exactly as it is conventionally presented and tested in the standard educational curriculum (like NCERT).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

From a strictly biochemical standpoint, 5' capping happens concurrently with transcription very early on, followed by splicing, and finally 3' tailing.
However, this specific question is universally framed based on the descriptive textual sequence presented in the NCERT biology textbook, which states: \textit{"Hence, it is subjected to a process called splicing where the introns are removed... hnRNA undergoes two additional processing called capping and tailing."
Many competitive exams formatting questions from this specific curriculum expect the answer based on this exact textual presentation rather than strict biochemical chronological order. Notice that none of the provided options even start with Capping, which further confirms that the expected answer relies entirely on the text sequence: Splicing described first, then Capping, then Tailing.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Based on standard curriculum conventions, the sequence is Splicing, Capping, Tailing. Quick Tip: When standard biological chronologies are conspicuously missing from the options (e.g., Capping \(\rightarrow\) Splicing \(\rightarrow\) Tailing is not an option), rely entirely on the sequence in which the processes are detailed sequentially in the standard curriculum textbook: Splicing, then Capping, then Tailing.


Question 90:

Hormone causing vigorous contraction of myometrium to initiate parturition is ________ .

  • (A) hCG
  • (B) ACTH
  • (C) corticosteroids
  • (D) oxytocin
Correct Answer: (D) oxytocin
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Parturition (the process of childbirth) requires incredibly strong, rhythmic contractions of the thick muscular layer of the uterus (the myometrium) to successfully expel the fetus.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the primary posterior pituitary hormone that directly targets smooth muscle cells in the uterus to stimulate contraction.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The initial signals from the fully developed fetus (the foetal ejection reflex) trigger the massive release of oxytocin from the maternal posterior pituitary gland. Oxytocin travels through the blood and acts directly on specific receptors in the uterine muscles (myometrium), causing stronger and stronger contractions. This action, in turn, stimulates further sensory nerve signals that cause even more secretion of oxytocin in a classic positive feedback loop. This rapid escalation leads to the increasingly vigorous contractions of the myometrium necessary to push the baby out through the birth canal.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Oxytocin is the hormone causing these vigorous contractions. Quick Tip: Oxytocin is universally widely known in biology as the "birth hormone" precisely because it directly stimulates myometrial contractions. Pitocin is the common synthetic version used clinically by doctors to induce labor.


Question 91:

Which plant hormone is called antitranspirant?

  • (A) Gibberellins
  • (B) Auxin
  • (C) Ethylene
  • (D) ABA
Correct Answer: (D) ABA
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Transpiration is the inevitable loss of water vapor from plant leaves, primarily occurring through the stomata. Antitranspirants are chemical substances applied to plants to reduce this water loss.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the endogenous plant growth regulator that naturally induces stomatal closure during environmental stress to conserve water.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Abscisic Acid (ABA) is widely known and studied as the "stress hormone" in plants. During periods of severe water stress (like drought), the ABA levels in the plant leaves increase significantly. This synthesized ABA acts rapidly on the guard cells surrounding the stomata, causing them to lose turgor pressure and close the stomatal pores. By physically closing the stomata, ABA drastically reduces water loss through transpiration. Because it naturally prevents this transpiration to save the plant from desiccation, ABA is functionally referred to as an endogenous antitranspirant.

Step 4: Final Answer:

ABA acts as an antitranspirant. Quick Tip: Associate ABA tightly with Stress: Think of Abscisic Acid as "Anti-Bad-Conditions". It forcefully closes stomata to save water during drought, thereby acting as a natural antitranspirant.


Question 92:

Blood osmolarity decreases with the secretion of

i. ADH

ii. aldosterone

iii. angiotensin II

iv. ANP

  • (A) i and ii only
  • (B) ii and iii only
  • (C) ii and iv only
  • (D) i only
Correct Answer: (D) i only
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Blood osmolarity refers to the total concentration of dissolved particles (solutes like sodium, glucose, urea) in the blood. Adding pure water to the blood decreases its osmolarity (dilution), while adding solutes increases it.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Determine which specific hormone promotes the reabsorption of "free water" (water without accompanying salt) by the kidneys, which serves to dilute the blood.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- ADH (Antidiuretic Hormone / Vasopressin): ADH is actively released by the posterior pituitary when blood osmolarity is too high. It acts by inserting aquaporin water channels into the collecting ducts of the kidneys, causing the rapid reabsorption of "free water" back into the bloodstream. This massive influx of pure water actively dilutes the blood, thereby definitively decreasing blood osmolarity back down to a normal level.
- Aldosterone: This hormone causes the active reabsorption of \(Na^{+}\) and, secondarily, water follows the salt osmotically. It generally expands total blood volume without significantly changing the osmolarity (this is called isosmotic reabsorption).
Therefore, ADH is the primary, specific hormone whose exact action is to dilute the blood and lower its osmolarity.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Only ADH directly decreases blood osmolarity. Quick Tip: ADH strictly manages WATER concentration (osmolarity). Aldosterone strictly manages SODIUM and total volume. More ADH = more free water retained = lower blood osmolarity.


Question 93:

Blood plasma transports oxygen in dissolved state, percentage of which is ________ .

  • (A) \(7%\)
  • (B) \(3%\)
  • (C) \(23%\)
  • (D) \(10%\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(3%\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Oxygen has a relatively low chemical solubility in water, meaning blood must rely heavily on the carrier protein hemoglobin for its efficient transport to tissues.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Recall the standard physiological distribution percentages for oxygen transport between Red Blood Cells and the liquid plasma.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

According to standard human physiological distribution metrics:
- Approximately 97% of the oxygen (\(O_{2}\)) entering the blood is rapidly transported by binding reversibly to hemoglobin molecules present inside the Red Blood Cells (RBCs).
- Due to its poor solubility, only the remaining 3% of the total oxygen is carried in a physically dissolved state directly through the water-based blood plasma.
This small, physically dissolved fraction is extremely important, however, as it is what specifically determines the partial pressure of oxygen (\(pO_{2}\)) in the blood.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The percentage transported in dissolved state is 3%. Quick Tip: Memorize these exact gas transport percentages: Oxygen transport: 97% RBC, 3% Plasma. Carbon Dioxide transport: 70% Bicarbonate, 20-25% RBC, 7% Plasma.


Question 94:

Which of the following statements are correct?

i. \(X\) chromosome has large amount of euchromatin.

ii. heterochromatin is genetically inert.

iii. Both X and Y chromosomes are homologous.

iv. Crossing over does not take place in sex chromosomes in female.

Choose the correct option.

  • (A) i and ii only
  • (B) ii and iii only
  • (C) i, ii and iii only
  • (D) iv and v only
Correct Answer: (A) i and ii only
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Chromosomes consist of functionally active regions (euchromatin) and inactive, heavily condensed regions (heterochromatin). Furthermore, sex chromosomes (X and Y) have specific homology and recombination rules during meiosis.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Evaluate the physical structure and genetic activity of the different chromatin types, and assess the homology and behavior of sex chromosomes in females.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- i. (Correct): The X chromosome is physically very large and contains hundreds of active genes, hence it possesses a large amount of loosely packed, transcriptionally active euchromatin. (Conversely, the Y chromosome is very small and mostly heterochromatic).
- ii. (Correct): Heterochromatin is highly condensed and tightly coiled, making the DNA physically inaccessible to the cell's transcription machinery. Thus, it is considered transcriptionally and genetically inert.
- iii. (Incorrect): The X and Y chromosomes are largely non-homologous. They differ vastly in size and gene content, sharing homology only in very small, specific regions called pseudoautosomal regions, which just barely allow them to pair up during male meiosis.
- iv. (Incorrect): Females have two complete X chromosomes (XX) which are fully homologous to each other. They pair up normally and undergo standard crossing over (recombination) during prophase I of meiosis exactly like any autosomes would.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statements i and ii are the only correct statements. Quick Tip: Remember the general rule: X is big and active (lots of Euchromatin). Y is small and mostly silent (lots of Heterochromatin). In females, the two XX chromosomes cross over perfectly normally.


Question 95:

Identify label ' X ' from the given diagram and name the cells, which regulate concentration of calcium and phosphorous in the blood and select the correct option given below.

\textit{Note: The original diagram is not present, but the descriptive options allow for identification based on functional definitions.

  • (A) Thyroid gland - Parafollicular cells
  • (B) Thyroid gland - Sertoli cells
  • (C) Parathyroid gland - Acidophils
  • (D) Parathyroid gland - chromatophores
Correct Answer: (A) Thyroid gland - Parafollicular cells
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Blood calcium and phosphorus levels are strictly regulated by specific hormones originating from the thyroid and parathyroid glands.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the correct anatomical gland and the specific cell type within it responsible for producing hormones that regulate blood calcium levels from the given combinations.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Parafollicular cells (also known commonly as C cells) are specialized cells located within the connective tissue of the Thyroid gland. They specifically secrete the hormone calcitonin (thyrocalcitonin), which actively lowers blood calcium levels by inhibiting bone breakdown (resorption) by osteoclasts.
- The Parathyroid glands do secrete Parathyroid Hormone (PTH) which actively raises blood calcium. However, the specific cells in the parathyroid that secrete PTH are called "Chief cells", absolutely not acidophils or chromatophores.
- Sertoli cells are nursing cells located in the seminiferous tubules of the testes, entirely unrelated to the thyroid.
Therefore, based purely on the physiological definitions provided in the options for cells that regulate calcium, Option (A) is the only biologically accurate pairing.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The Thyroid gland's parafollicular cells regulate calcium. Quick Tip: Anatomy of the Thyroid gland: Follicular cells produce T3/T4 for basal metabolism. Parafollicular 'C' cells produce Calcitonin for Calcium regulation.


Question 96:

Which one of the following is the most primitive ancestor of Homo sapiens?

  • (A) Ramapithecus
  • (B) Australopithecus
  • (C) Dryopithecus
  • (D) Neanderthal man
Correct Answer: (C) Dryopithecus
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Human evolutionary history outlines a long lineage progressing from primitive ape-like ancestors through various hominid stages to modern man.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Order the given hominid ancestors chronologically from the oldest (most primitive) fossil records to the most recent.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The general chronological sequence of hominid evolution given in standard biology textbooks is:
Dryopithecus \(\rightarrow\) \textit{Ramapithecus \(\rightarrow\) \textit{Australopithecus \(\rightarrow\) \textit{Homo habilis \(\rightarrow\) \textit{Homo erectus \(\rightarrow\) \textit{Homo neanderthalensis \(\rightarrow\) \textit{Homo sapiens.
\textit{Dryopithecus is an extinct genus of apes that lived approximately 15 to 20 million years ago and is widely considered a common ancestor for both modern apes and humans, making it unequivocally the most primitive and oldest ancestor in the provided list.

Step 4: Final Answer:

\textit{Dryopithecus is the most primitive ancestor listed. Quick Tip: Remember the evolutionary mnemonic "Dr. RAM": \textbf{Dryopithecus (oldest/primitive), \textbf{R}amapithecus, \textbf{A}ustralopithecus, \textbf{M}an (Homo).


Question 97:

Match column I with column II and select the correct option.

  • (A) i-c ii-b iii-a iv-d
  • (B) i-b ii-a iii-d iv-c
  • (C) i-a ii-c iii-b iv-d
  • (D) i-d ii-a iii-b iv-c
Correct Answer: (D) i-d ii-a iii-b iv-c
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The human cerebrum is structurally divided into four main lobes, each of which harbors specific cortical areas responsible for distinct sensory and motor processing functions.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Accurately match each major lobe of the cerebral cortex with its primary sensory or motor functional area.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Occipital lobe (iv): The primary visual cortex is located here at the back of the brain. It is exclusively responsible for processing the sense of vision. Thus, iv matches c.
- Temporal lobe (iii): Houses the primary auditory cortex and the olfactory cortex (which processes the sense of smell via olfactory receptors). Thus, iii matches b.
- Frontal lobe (i): Contains the primary motor cortex and the essential motor speech area known as Broca's area, responsible for speech production. Thus, i matches d.
- Parietal lobe (ii): Contains the primary somatosensory cortex and the gustatory cortex (which processes taste via gustatory receptors). Thus, ii matches a.

This results in the matching sequence: i-d, ii-a, iii-b, iv-c.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (D) provides the correct matches. Quick Tip: Visualizing the layout of the brain helps immensely: Occipital (far back) = Eyes/Vision. Temporal (sides near ears) = Hearing/Smell. Frontal (front) = Movement/Speech. Parietal (top/back) = Touch/Taste.


Question 98:

Which one of the following diseases is caused by a fungus?

  • (A) Filariasis
  • (B) Ringworm
  • (C) Typhoid
  • (D) Acute coryza
Correct Answer: (B) Ringworm
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Common human diseases are caused by a wide variety of pathogens, broadly categorized into viruses, bacteria, protozoa, helminths (worms), and fungi.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the biological causative agent for each listed disease to locate the one caused by a fungus.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- Ringworm: Despite its misleading name, this is a highly contagious skin infection caused by a group of fungi known collectively as dermatophytes (specifically belonging to the genera \textit{Microsporum, \textit{Trichophyton, and \textit{Epidermophyton).
- Filariasis: This is caused by a parasitic helminth (filarial worm), such as \textit{Wuchereria bancrofti.
- Typhoid: This is a bacterial infection caused by the bacterium \textit{Salmonella typhi.
- Acute coryza: This is the medical term for the common cold, which is caused by a virus (most commonly Rhinovirus).

Step 4: Final Answer:

Ringworm is the disease caused by a fungus. Quick Tip: Ringworm is a famous historical misnomer; there is absolutely no worm involved! It is strictly a fungal infection of the skin, hair, or nails.


Question 99:

Respiratory centres that control the rate and depth of breathing are located in ________

  • (A) medulla oblongata only
  • (B) cerebrum only
  • (C) cerebellum and pons
  • (D) pons and medulla oblongata
Correct Answer: (D) pons and medulla oblongata
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Breathing is an involuntary life process that is tightly and continuously regulated by specific neural networks located in the brainstem to maintain optimal oxygen and carbon dioxide levels in the blood.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Identify the specific regions of the brainstem that house the respiratory rhythm and pneumotaxic centers.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The central neural control of respiration involves multiple interconnected centers located specifically in the brainstem:
- Medulla oblongata: Contains the primary Respiratory Rhythm Centre. This center establishes the basic rhythm of breathing (the pattern of inspiration and expiration).
- Pons: Contains the Pneumotaxic Centre, which acts as a critical "switch-off" point for inspiration. It moderates and fine-tunes the functions of the rhythm center in the medulla, actively altering the respiratory rate and the depth of each breath.

Together, the neural centers in both the pons and the medulla oblongata continuously coordinate to completely control breathing.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The centers are located in both the pons and medulla oblongata. Quick Tip: Brainstem = Pons + Medulla. Both are absolutely required for normal, adjusted breathing. Medulla generates the base rhythm; Pons fine-tunes it based on bodily needs.


Question 100:

In sea grass, pollens are long, ribbon like and without exine exhibiting ________ pollination.

  • (A) ornithophilous
  • (B) hypohydrophilous
  • (C) epihydrophilous
  • (D) anaemophilous
Correct Answer: (B) hypohydrophilous
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Pollination facilitated by water is called hydrophily. It is further precisely divided based on whether the pollination event occurs floating on the surface of the water or entirely submerged beneath it.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Approach: Analyze the specific physical adaptations (ribbon-like, lack of exine) and the natural habitat (sea grass) to accurately classify the sub-type of water pollination.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Sea grasses, such as Zostera, are marine angiosperms that live their entire life cycle completely submerged in water. The female flowers remain permanently submerged, and the pollen grains are released directly into the water column. These pollen grains are distinctively long, ribbon-like, and lack a hard protective exine, allowing them to drift passively in water currents to eventually reach the stigma.
Because this entire pollination process occurs underneath the water surface, it is specifically termed hypohydrophilous (where hypo- means under or below).
- Epihydrophily occurs floating on the water surface (e.g., \textit{Vallisneria).
- Ornithophily is pollination by birds.
- Anemophily (spelled anaemophilous here) is pollination by wind.

Step 4: Final Answer:

This exhibits hypohydrophilous pollination. Quick Tip: Differentiate water pollinators: \textit{Zostera (marine sea grass) = completely submerged = \textbf{Hypo}hydrophily. Vallisneria (freshwater tape grass) = surface floating flowers = \textbf{Epi}hydrophily.


Chemistry

Question 1:

Which element from following does NOT exhibit magnetic moment in +1 state?

  • (A) Zn
  • (B) Co
  • (C) Cu
  • (D) Mn
Correct Answer: (C) Cu
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The magnetic moment of an ion depends on the presence of unpaired electrons in its d-orbitals.

If an ion has no unpaired electrons, its magnetic moment is zero, meaning it does not exhibit a magnetic moment.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Write the electronic configuration for the neutral atom and then remove one electron to find the +1 state configuration, then count the number of unpaired electrons.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Zn (\(Z=30\)): Neutral atom configuration is \([Ar]\, 3d^{10}\, 4s^{2}\).

The \(+1\) state would be \(Zn^+\): \([Ar]\, 3d^{10}\, 4s^{1}\).

It has 1 unpaired electron in the 4s orbital, so it exhibits a magnetic moment.

(B) Co (\(Z=27\)): Neutral atom configuration is \([Ar]\, 3d^{7}\, 4s^{2}\).

The \(+1\) state would be \(Co^+\): \([Ar]\, 3d^{8}\).

It has 2 unpaired electrons in the 3d orbitals, so it exhibits a magnetic moment.

(C) Cu (\(Z=29\)): Neutral atom configuration is anomalously \([Ar]\, 3d^{10}\, 4s^{1}\).

The \(+1\) state is \(Cu^+\): \([Ar]\, 3d^{10}\).

All d-orbitals are completely filled, meaning there are 0 unpaired electrons.

(D) Mn (\(Z=25\)): Neutral atom configuration is \([Ar]\, 3d^{5}\, 4s^{2}\).

The \(+1\) state would be \(Mn^+\): \([Ar]\, 3d^{5}\, 4s^{1}\).

It has 6 unpaired electrons, so it exhibits a large magnetic moment.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Since \(Cu^+\) has no unpaired electrons, it does not exhibit a magnetic moment.
Quick Tip: Always write down the full electronic configuration including exceptions like Cu (\([Ar] 3d^{10} 4s^1\)).
When forming cations, remove electrons from the outermost shell (ns) first before removing from the (n-1)d shell.


Question 2:

The entropy of vaporisation of benzene is \(85 J K^{-1} mol^{-1}\). When 117 g of benzene vaporises at its boiling point, what is entropy change of surrounding if process is at equilibrium?

  • (A) \(-85 J K^{-1}\)
  • (B) \(-85 \times 1.5 J K^{-1}\)
  • (C) \(85 \times 1.5 J K^{-1}\)
  • (D) \(42.5 J K^{-1}\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(-85 \times 1.5 \text{ J K}^{-1}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

For a process occurring at equilibrium (like a reversible phase change at its boiling point), the total entropy change of the universe is zero.

This means \(\Delta S_{universe} = \Delta S_{system} + \Delta S_{surroundings} = 0\).

Therefore, the entropy change of the surroundings is the negative of the entropy change of the system.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the formula \(\Delta S_{system} = n \times \Delta S_{vap, m}\), and then apply \(\Delta S_{surroundings} = -\Delta S_{system}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The molecular formula of benzene is \(C_6H_6\).

Molar mass of benzene = \((6 \times 12) + (6 \times 1) = 78 g mol^{-1}\).

Given mass of benzene (\(m\)) = \(117 g\).

Number of moles (\(n\)) = \(\frac{Mass}{Molar Mass} = \frac{117}{78} = 1.5 mol\).

Entropy change of the system (\(\Delta S_{system}\)) for 1.5 moles is \(\Delta S_{system} = 1.5 mol \times 85 J K^{-1} mol^{-1} = 1.5 \times 85 J K^{-1}\).

Now, calculate the entropy change of the surroundings.
\(\Delta S_{surroundings} = -\Delta S_{system} = -85 \times 1.5 J K^{-1}\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The entropy change of the surroundings is \(-85 \times 1.5 J K^{-1}\).
Quick Tip: Remember that at phase equilibrium (melting point, boiling point), the process is reversible, so \(\Delta S_{total} = 0\).
This implies heat absorbed by the system is exactly matched by heat lost by the surroundings at the constant temperature \(T\).


Question 3:

Which from the following equations represents the relation between solubility ( \(mol L^{-1}\) ) and solubility product for the salt \(B_2A\) ?

  • (A) \(S = \left( \frac{K_{sp}}{4} \right)^{1/3}\)
  • (B) \(S = (4 K_{sp})^{1/3}\)
  • (C) \(S = \left( \frac{K_{sp}}{3} \right)^{1/3}\)
  • (D) \(S = (3 K_{sp})^{1/3}\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(\text{S} = \left( \frac{\text{K}_{\text{sp}}}{4} \right)^{1/3}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The solubility product constant (\(K_{sp}\)) is the equilibrium constant for a solid substance dissolving in an aqueous solution.

It is derived from the dissociation equation of the salt.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Write the dissociation equation for the salt \(B_2A\) and express the equilibrium concentrations of the ions in terms of the molar solubility \(S\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The salt \(B_2A\) dissociates in water as follows:
\[ B_2A_{(s)} \rightleftharpoons 2B^+_{(aq)} + A^{2-}_{(aq)} \]
Let the molar solubility of the salt \(B_2A\) be \(S mol L^{-1}\).

From the stoichiometry, the concentration of \(B^+\) ions is \([B^+] = 2S\).

The concentration of \(A^{2-}\) ions is \([A^{2-}] = S\).

The expression for the solubility product is:
\[ K_{sp} = [B^+]^2 [A^{2-}] \]
Substitute the equilibrium concentrations in terms of \(S\):
\[ K_{sp} = (2S)^2 \times (S) \] \[ K_{sp} = 4S^2 \times S = 4S^3 \]
Solving for solubility \(S\):
\[ S^3 = \frac{K_{sp}}{4} \] \[ S = \left( \frac{K_{sp}}{4} \right)^{1/3} \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct relation is \(S = \left( \frac{K_{sp}}{4} \right)^{1/3}\).
Quick Tip: For a general salt \(A_xB_y\), the relation between \(K_{sp}\) and solubility \(S\) is always \(K_{sp} = x^x y^y S^{(x+y)}\).
Here \(x=2, y=1\), so \(K_{sp} = 2^2 \cdot 1^1 \cdot S^3 = 4S^3\).


Question 4:

What is the number of chiral carbon atoms and number of formyl groups respectively present in ribose?

  • (A) 2 and 2
  • (B) 2 and 1
  • (C) 3 and 1
  • (D) 3 and 2
Correct Answer: (C) 3 and 1
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ribose is an aldopentose sugar with the chemical formula \(C_5H_{10}O_5\).

A chiral carbon is a carbon atom that is bonded to four different groups.

A formyl group is an aldehyde functional group (\(-CHO\)).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Examine the open-chain Fischer projection structure of D-ribose to count the specific groups.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The open-chain structure of ribose is \(CHO-CH(OH)-CH(OH)-CH(OH)-CH_2OH\).

The first carbon (C1) is part of the aldehyde group, which is the formyl group (\(-CHO\)).

There is exactly 1 formyl group present in the molecule.

Carbon atoms C2, C3, and C4 are each attached to four different groups (\(-H\), \(-OH\), and two different carbon chains).

Therefore, C2, C3, and C4 are chiral centers.

Carbon C5 is attached to two identical hydrogen atoms, so it is achiral.

This gives a total of 3 chiral carbon atoms.

Step 4: Final Answer:

There are 3 chiral carbon atoms and 1 formyl group in ribose.
Quick Tip: Aldopentoses like ribose, arabinose, xylose, and lyxose all have an open-chain structure with 5 carbons, 1 aldehyde group, and 3 internal chiral centers.


Question 5:

Calculate the Henry's law constant at \(25^\circC\) if solubility of gas in liquid is \(2.1 \times 10^{-2} moldm^{-3}\) at \(0.18 bar\).

  • (A) \(0.1166 moldm^{-3}bar^{-1}\)
  • (B) \(0.1445 moldm^{-3}bar^{-1}\)
  • (C) \(0.1730 moldm^{-3}bar^{-1}\)
  • (D) \(0.2014 moldm^{-3}bar^{-1}\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(0.1166 \text{ moldm}^{-3}\text{bar}^{-1}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Henry's law, the solubility (\(S\)) of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional to the partial pressure (\(P\)) of the gas above the liquid.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

The relationship is expressed by the formula \(S = K_H \times P\), where \(K_H\) is the Henry's law constant.

Rearranging to solve for \(K_H\) gives \(K_H = \frac{S}{P}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given solubility, \(S = 2.1 \times 10^{-2} moldm^{-3}\).

Given pressure, \(P = 0.18 bar\).

Substitute the values into the equation:
\[ K_H = \frac{2.1 \times 10^{-2} moldm^{-3}}{0.18 bar} \] \[ K_H = \frac{0.021}{0.18} moldm^{-3}bar^{-1} \] \[ K_H = \frac{21}{180} = \frac{7}{60} moldm^{-3}bar^{-1} \] \[ K_H \approx 0.11666... moldm^{-3}bar^{-1} \]
Rounding to the appropriate decimal places gives \(0.1166 moldm^{-3}bar^{-1}\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The Henry's law constant is \(0.1166 moldm^{-3}bar^{-1}\).
Quick Tip: Pay close attention to units.
Henry's constant can be expressed in various forms depending on how the law is stated (e.g., \(P = K_H \cdot \chi\) vs \(S = K_H \cdot P\)).
Always check the units of the options to know which formula to apply.


Question 6:

What is the name of isopropyl alcohol according to carbinol system?

  • (A) Methyl carbinol
  • (B) Dimethyl carbinol
  • (C) Ethyl carbinol
  • (D) Propyl carbinol
Correct Answer: (B) Dimethyl carbinol
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In the carbinol system of nomenclature, the simplest alcohol, methanol (\(CH_3OH\)), is named "carbinol".

Other alcohols are named as derivatives of carbinol by stating the names of the alkyl groups attached to the carbinol carbon.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the central \(-C-OH\) group as the "carbinol" base, and then name the attached alkyl substituents.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The structure of isopropyl alcohol is \(CH_3-CH(OH)-CH_3\).

Identify the carbinol carbon: It is the central \(-CH-\) carbon because it holds the \(-OH\) group.

Look at the groups attached to this carbinol carbon: There are two methyl (\(-CH_3\)) groups attached to it.

Therefore, the name is derived by combining "dimethyl" with the base name "carbinol".

Step 4: Final Answer:

The name is Dimethyl carbinol.
Quick Tip: To name via the carbinol system, mentally circle the \(-C-OH\) part as "carbinol", then just name the alkyl substituents sticking out of that circle in alphabetical order.


Question 7:

What is the frequency of red light having wave length \(750 nm\) ?

  • (A) \(3.0 \times 10^{14} Hz\)
  • (B) \(4.0 \times 10^{14} Hz\)
  • (C) \(7.5 \times 10^{14} Hz\)
  • (D) \(9.0 \times 10^{14} Hz\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(4.0 \times 10^{14} \text{ Hz}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The frequency and wavelength of light are inversely proportional to each other, related by the speed of light.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the equation \(c = \nu \times \lambda\), where \(c\) is the speed of light, \(\nu\) is the frequency, and \(\lambda\) is the wavelength.

Rearrange to solve for frequency: \(\nu = \frac{c}{\lambda}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The speed of light in vacuum is \(c = 3.0 \times 10^8 m s^{-1}\).

The wavelength must be converted from nanometers to meters: \(\lambda = 750 nm = 750 \times 10^{-9} m = 7.5 \times 10^{-7} m\).

Substitute the values into the formula:
\[ \nu = \frac{3.0 \times 10^8 m s^{-1}}{7.5 \times 10^{-7} m} \] \[ \nu = \left(\frac{3.0}{7.5}\right) \times 10^{8 - (-7)} s^{-1} \] \[ \nu = \left(\frac{1}{2.5}\right) \times 10^{15} Hz \] \[ \nu = 0.4 \times 10^{15} Hz = 4.0 \times 10^{14} Hz \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The frequency of the red light is \(4.0 \times 10^{14} Hz\).
Quick Tip: Always ensure your units are consistent before calculating.
Standardize lengths to meters when working with the speed of light \(c = 3 \times 10^8 m/s\).
Remember \(1 nm = 10^{-9} m\).


Question 8:

Identify the product 'C' formed in the following series of reactions.

  • (A) Ethane
  • (B) Bromoethane
  • (C) Ethyl magnesium bromide
  • (D) Ethene
Correct Answer: (B) Bromoethane
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

This sequence involves the formation of a Grignard reagent, its subsequent hydrolysis to an alkane, and finally, the free-radical halogenation of that alkane.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Trace the chemical transformations step-by-step by identifying the reagent functions at each stage.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Reaction to form A: Bromoethane (\(CH_3CH_2Br\)) reacts with Magnesium in dry ether to form the Grignard reagent.
\[ CH_3CH_2Br + Mg \xrightarrow{Dry ether} CH_3CH_2MgBr \quad (Compound A) \]
Compound A is Ethyl magnesium bromide.

Reaction to form B: The Grignard reagent reacts with water (\(HOH\)) in an acid-base reaction to form an alkane.
\[ CH_3CH_2MgBr + H_2O \rightarrow CH_3CH_3 + Mg(OH)Br \]
Compound B is Ethane (\(CH_3CH_3\)).

Reaction to form C: Ethane undergoes free radical substitution with bromine in the presence of UV light.
\[ CH_3CH_3 + Br_2 \xrightarrow{UV Light} CH_3CH_2Br + HBr \]
Compound C is Bromoethane.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The final product 'C' is Bromoethane.
Quick Tip: Grignard reagents (\(RMgX\)) are strong bases and react violently with protic solvents like water to form the corresponding alkane (\(RH\)).
The sequence "alkylation \(\rightarrow\) hydrolysis \(\rightarrow\) halogenation" is a common cycle that often returns you to a functionalized starting-like molecule.


Question 9:

Which from following groups exhibits +I effect?

  • (A) \(-COOR\)
  • (B) \(-COOH\)
  • (C) \(-C_2H_5\)
  • (D) \(-NO_2\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(-\text{C}_2\text{H}_5\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The inductive effect refers to the permanent polarization of a single covalent bond due to differences in electronegativity.

Electron-withdrawing groups exhibit a -I effect, while electron-donating groups exhibit a +I effect.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate each group based on its constituent atoms; highly electronegative atoms (O, N, halogens) typically withdraw electrons, whereas alkyl groups donate electrons.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) \(-COOR\) (Ester group): The carbon is bonded to highly electronegative oxygen atoms, making it electron-withdrawing (-I effect).

(B) \(-COOH\) (Carboxyl group): Similar to the ester group, the highly electronegative oxygens cause a strong electron-withdrawing inductive effect (-I effect).

(C) \(-C_2H_5\) (Ethyl group): Alkyl groups generally release electron density via the +I effect due to hyperconjugation and the relatively low electronegativity of carbon.

(D) \(-NO_2\) (Nitro group): Nitrogen is bonded to two highly electronegative oxygen atoms, making it one of the strongest electron-withdrawing groups (-I effect).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The ethyl group (\(-C_2H_5\)) exhibits a +I effect.
Quick Tip: Memorize the general order of inductive effects.
+I groups: Alkyls (\(3^\circ > 2^\circ > 1^\circ > CH_3\)), \(-O^-\), \(-COO^-\).
-I groups: Halogens, \(-NO_2\), \(-CN\), \(-COOH\), \(-CHO\), etc.


Question 10:

Which of the following equation exhibits integrated rate law equation for first order reaction?

  • (A) \(k = \frac{[A]_0 - [A]_t}{t}\)
  • (B) \(k = \frac{2.303}{t} \times \log \frac{a}{(a-x)}\)
  • (C) \(k = \frac{1}{t} \ln \frac{(a-x)}{a}\)
  • (D) \(k = \frac{1}{t} \times \frac{x}{a(a-x)}\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\text{k} = \frac{2.303}{t} \times \log \frac{\text{a}}{(\text{a}-\text{x})}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The integrated rate law for a first-order reaction describes how the concentration of a reactant decreases exponentially over time.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

The differential rate law \(Rate = -d[A]/dt = k[A]\) integrates to \(\ln([A]_0/[A]_t) = kt\).

Convert this natural logarithm expression into a base-10 logarithm expression.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Starting with the natural log form: \(k = \frac{1}{t} \ln\left(\frac{[A]_0}{[A]_t}\right)\).

To convert from natural logarithm (\(\ln\)) to common logarithm (\(\log\)), we multiply by the conversion factor 2.303.
\[ k = \frac{2.303}{t} \log\left(\frac{[A]_0}{[A]_t}\right) \]
In standard kinetic notation, initial concentration \([A]_0\) is denoted as \(a\), and the amount reacted at time \(t\) is \(x\).

Thus, the remaining concentration \([A]_t\) is \((a - x)\).

Substitute these into the equation:
\[ k = \frac{2.303}{t} \log\left(\frac{a}{a - x}\right) \]
This matches option (B).

Option (A) is for a zero-order reaction.

Option (C) has an inverted ratio inside the natural logarithm.

Option (D) is for a second-order reaction.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct equation is \(k = \frac{2.303}{t} \times \log \frac{a}{(a-x)}\).
Quick Tip: A quick way to distinguish these is by checking the units of \(k\) that would result.
For 1st order, \(k\) must have units of \(time^{-1}\).
In option B, the log term is dimensionless, leaving \(1/t\) which is \(time^{-1}\).


Question 11:

Which from following statements is NOT true about physisorption?

  • (A) The forces operating are weak van der Waals forces.
  • (B) It is not specific in nature.
  • (C) It is irreversible.
  • (D) The heat of adsorption is low and lies in the range \(20 - 40 kJ mol^{-1}\).
Correct Answer: (C) It is irreversible.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Physisorption, or physical adsorption, occurs when gas molecules accumulate on a solid surface due to weak physical forces rather than chemical bonds.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate each statement against the known characteristics of physical adsorption.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Forces: Physisorption arises because of weak van der Waals forces. This statement is TRUE.

(B) Specificity: Since van der Waals forces exist between any two types of molecules, physisorption is not specific. This statement is TRUE.

(C) Reversibility: Physisorption is an equilibrium process and is highly reversible. Increasing temperature or decreasing pressure readily causes desorption. Therefore, the statement "It is irreversible" is FALSE.

(D) Enthalpy: Because the physical bonds are weak, the enthalpy (heat) of adsorption is relatively low, typically \(20 - 40 kJ mol^{-1}\). This statement is TRUE.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement (C) is not true; physisorption is indeed reversible.
Quick Tip: Contrast physisorption and chemisorption: Physisorption is weak, reversible, multi-layered, and non-specific.
Chemisorption is strong, often irreversible, single-layered, and highly specific.


Question 12:

Which from following is a semisynthetic polymer?

  • (A) Silk
  • (B) Terylene
  • (C) Viscose rayon
  • (D) Neoprene
Correct Answer: (C) Viscose rayon
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Polymers are classified by their origin into natural, synthetic, and semisynthetic types.

Semisynthetic polymers are derived from naturally occurring polymers through chemical modifications to alter their physical properties.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the source and processing method of each given polymer option.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Silk is a natural protein fiber produced by silkworms. It is a completely natural polymer.

(B) Terylene (Dacron) is a polyester made entirely from petrochemicals (ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid). It is a synthetic polymer.

(C) Viscose rayon is manufactured from natural cellulose (obtained from wood pulp). The natural cellulose undergoes extensive chemical treatment to form a soluble derivative, which is then regenerated into fibers. Thus, it is a semisynthetic polymer.

(D) Neoprene is a synthetic rubber produced by the polymerization of chloroprene. It is entirely synthetic.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Viscose rayon is the semisynthetic polymer among the choices.
Quick Tip: Remember that "rayon" generally refers to regenerated cellulose fibers.
While the starting material is natural (cellulose), the extensive chemical processing makes it a classic example of a semisynthetic polymer.


Question 13:

Calculate the molar mass of an element having density \(19.2 g cm^{-3}\) if it forms fcc structure \(\left[ a^3 \times N_{A} = 40 cm^3 mol^{-1} \right]\)

  • (A) \(192 g mol^{-1}\)
  • (B) \(186 g mol^{-1}\)
  • (C) \(210 g mol^{-1}\)
  • (D) \(280 g mol^{-1}\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(192 \text{ g mol}^{-1}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The density of a crystalline solid can be calculated from the properties of its unit cell.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the formula for the density of a unit cell: \(d = \frac{Z \times M}{a^3 \times N_A}\).

Rearrange this to solve for molar mass: \(M = \frac{d \times (a^3 \times N_A)}{Z}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For a face-centered cubic (fcc) lattice, the number of atoms per unit cell is \(Z = 4\).

The density is given as \(d = 19.2 g cm^{-3}\).

The problem provides the combined value of the volume term: \(a^3 \times N_A = 40 cm^3 mol^{-1}\).

Substitute the values into the rearranged formula:
\[ M = \frac{19.2 g cm^{-3} \times 40 cm^3 mol^{-1}}{4} \] \[ M = \frac{768}{4} g mol^{-1} \] \[ M = 192 g mol^{-1} \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The molar mass of the element is \(192 g mol^{-1}\).
Quick Tip: Know the \(Z\) values for common unit cells: Simple Cubic (\(Z=1\)), Body-Centered Cubic (bcc, \(Z=2\)), Face-Centered Cubic (fcc, \(Z=4\)).
Always check units to ensure they cancel out properly to yield g/mol.


Question 14:

Which among the following is the strongest acid?

  • (A) Acetic acid
  • (B) Monochloroacetic acid
  • (C) Dichloroacetic acid
  • (D) Trichloroacetic acid
Correct Answer: (D) Trichloroacetic acid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The strength of an acid is determined by the stability of its conjugate base.

A more stable conjugate base corresponds to a stronger parent acid.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the inductive effects (-I effect) of substituents attached to the alpha-carbon of the carboxylic acids. Electron-withdrawing groups stabilize the carboxylate anion.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Acetic acid (\(CH_3COOH\)): The methyl group has a slight +I (electron-donating) effect, which destabilizes the carboxylate anion.

(B) Monochloroacetic acid (\(CH_2ClCOOH\)): One electronegative chlorine atom provides a -I effect, stabilizing the anion and making it more acidic than acetic acid.

(C) Dichloroacetic acid (\(CHCl_2COOH\)): Two chlorine atoms provide a stronger cumulative -I effect, further stabilizing the anion.

(D) Trichloroacetic acid (\(CCl_3COOH\)): Three chlorine atoms provide the strongest -I effect among the choices. This highly stabilizes the resulting trichloroacetate ion by dispersing the negative charge.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Because it has the most electron-withdrawing groups, Trichloroacetic acid is the strongest acid.
Quick Tip: Acid strength \(\propto\) Stability of conjugate base \(\propto\) Number of electron-withdrawing groups (EWG).
The order of acidity here is \(CCl_3COOH > CHCl_2COOH > CH_2ClCOOH > CH_3COOH\).


Question 15:

What is the ratio of mass of nitrogen that combines with 16 parts by weight of oxygen in \(N_2O, NO, NO_2\) ?

  • (A) 4 : 2 : 1
  • (B) 2 : 1 : 1
  • (C) 1 : 1 : 2
  • (D) 1 : 2 : 4
Correct Answer: (A) 4 : 2 : 1
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

This problem applies the Law of Multiple Proportions, demonstrating how different masses of one element combine with a fixed mass of another element to form different compounds.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Calculate the mass of Nitrogen that combines with exactly 16 grams (or parts by weight) of Oxygen in each given compound, using their atomic masses (\(N=14\), \(O=16\)).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

1. For \(N_2O\):

Mass of N = \(2 \times 14 = 28\) parts.

Mass of O = \(1 \times 16 = 16\) parts.

Thus, mass of N reacting with 16 parts of O is 28.

2. For \(NO\):

Mass of N = \(1 \times 14 = 14\) parts.

Mass of O = \(1 \times 16 = 16\) parts.

Thus, mass of N reacting with 16 parts of O is 14.

3. For \(NO_2\):

Mass of N = \(1 \times 14 = 14\) parts.

Mass of O = \(2 \times 16 = 32\) parts.

To find the mass of N reacting with 16 parts of O, we set up a proportion:

Since 32 parts O combine with 14 parts N, 16 parts O combine with \((14 / 2) = 7\) parts N.

The ratio of the masses of Nitrogen is \(28 : 14 : 7\).

Dividing by 7 to simplify gives \(4 : 2 : 1\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio is 4 : 2 : 1.
Quick Tip: To quickly find ratios for the Law of Multiple Proportions, fix the mass of one element in the chemical formulas.
Here, fixing O to 1 equivalent: \(N_2O\) (N=2), \(NO\) (N=1), \(NO_2\) can be written as \(N_{0.5}O\).
The ratio of N atoms is \(2 : 1 : 0.5\), which simplifies to \(4 : 2 : 1\).


Question 16:

What is the quantity of electricity required to liberate \(112 cm^3\) of hydrogen gas at STP from acidified water?

  • (A) \(482.5 C\)
  • (B) \(965 C\)
  • (C) \(500 C\)
  • (D) \(96500 C\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(965 \text{ C}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Faraday's laws of electrolysis, the amount of substance liberated at an electrode is proportional to the total electrical charge passed through the electrolyte.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Write the cathodic reduction half-reaction to determine electron stoichiometry. Convert the given volume of gas to moles at STP (\(V_m = 22400 cm^3\)). Then, calculate the required charge using \(Q = n \times z \times F\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The reduction reaction for hydrogen is: \(2H^+_{(aq)} + 2e^- \rightarrow H_{2(g)}\).

This shows that \(z = 2\) moles of electrons are required to produce 1 mole of \(H_2\) gas.

First, calculate the number of moles (\(n\)) of \(H_2\) produced:
\(n = \frac{Volume}{Molar Volume} = \frac{112 cm^3}{22400 cm^3 mol^{-1}} = \frac{1}{200} mol = 0.005 mol\).

Next, calculate the charge required. One mole of electrons carries \(1 Faraday \approx 96500 C\).

Total charge \(Q = n \times z \times F\).
\(Q = 0.005 mol \times 2 \times 96500 C/mol\).
\(Q = 0.01 \times 96500 C = 965 C\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The quantity of electricity required is \(965 C\).
Quick Tip: Faraday's laws problems are basically stoichiometry.
Just remember the link: 1 mole of \(e^-\) carries \(96500 C\) of charge.
Always write the half-reaction to accurately find the number of electrons involved per mole of product.


Question 17:

Which of the following is selected as cathode for a galvanic cell set up with nickel anode?

  • (A) Mg
  • (B) Cu
  • (C) Al
  • (D) Zn
Correct Answer: (B) Cu
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In a galvanic (voltaic) cell, spontaneous redox reactions generate electricity.

The anode is where oxidation occurs, and it must have a lower standard reduction potential.

The cathode is where reduction occurs, and it must have a relatively higher standard reduction potential.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Compare the standard reduction potentials (\(E^\circ\)) of the given metals with that of Nickel. The metal to act as the cathode must have a higher \(E^\circ\) than Nickel.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The standard reduction potential for Nickel is \(E^\circ(Ni^{2+}/Ni) \approx -0.25 V\).

Let's consider the relative reduction potentials of the options:

(A) \(E^\circ(Mg^{2+}/Mg) \approx -2.37 V\).

(B) \(E^\circ(Cu^{2+}/Cu) \approx +0.34 V\).

(C) \(E^\circ(Al^{3+}/Al) \approx -1.66 V\).

(D) \(E^\circ(Zn^{2+}/Zn) \approx -0.76 V\).

Since Copper (Cu) is the only metal among the choices with a reduction potential higher than Nickel's, it is the only one that will spontaneously undergo reduction when paired with a Nickel half-cell.

Therefore, Copper will serve as the cathode.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Copper (Cu) is selected as the cathode.
Quick Tip: You don't need to memorize exact values, just the general order of the electrochemical series.
Metals like Cu, Ag, Au, Pt are "noble" and have positive potentials (act as cathodes against most metals).
Reactive metals like Mg, Al, Zn, Fe, Ni have negative potentials.


Question 18:

Which among the following is haloarene?

  • (A)
  • (B)
  • (C)
  • (D)
Correct Answer: (D) Image showing a benzene ring with an \(-\text{X}\) group directly attached
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Halogenated organic compounds are classified based on the nature of the carbon atom bonded to the halogen.

A "haloarene" (or aryl halide) is a compound in which the halogen atom is directly bonded to an \(sp^2\) hybridized carbon atom of an aromatic ring.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Examine the structure of each option to find where the halogen (X) is attached directly to the aromatic benzene ring.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) The halogen is attached to a saturated \(-CH_2-\) group which is then attached to the benzene ring. This is a benzylic halide.

(B) The halogen is attached to an \(sp^3\) carbon adjacent to a double bond in a non-aromatic ring. This is an allylic halide.

(C) The halogen is attached to a fully saturated, non-aromatic cyclohexane ring. This is a cycloalkyl halide.

(D) The halogen is attached directly to one of the \(sp^2\) carbons of the aromatic benzene ring. This perfectly matches the definition of a haloarene.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (D) represents a haloarene.
Quick Tip: To identify a haloarene, look for the direct bond between the halogen atom and the aromatic ring.
If there is even one saturated carbon atom in between (like in a \(-CH_2X\) group), it is a benzylic halide, not a haloarene.


Question 19:

Which from following chemical activities does NOT exhibit good atom economy according to the principles of green chemistry?

  • (A) Formation of Grignard reagent.
  • (B) Action of HX on alkene to form alkylhalide.
  • (C) Action of thionyl chloride on ethanol to form ethyl chloride.
  • (D) Formation of cyclohexanol from phenol by catalytic hydrogenation.
Correct Answer: (C) Action of thionyl chloride on ethanol to form ethyl chloride.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Atom economy evaluates how efficiently reactant atoms are incorporated into the final desired product.

High atom economy means fewer waste byproducts are formed.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Analyze the reaction types. Addition and insertion reactions typically have 100% atom economy, while substitution and elimination reactions yield side products, lowering the atom economy.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Formation of Grignard reagent: \(R-X + Mg \rightarrow R-Mg-X\). All atoms are incorporated into the product. It has 100% atom economy.

(B) Action of \(HX\) on alkene: \(R-CH=CH_2 + HX \rightarrow R-CH(X)-CH_3\). This is an addition reaction; all reactant atoms end up in the product. It has 100% atom economy.

(C) Action of thionyl chloride on ethanol: \(CH_3CH_2OH + SOCl_2 \rightarrow CH_3CH_2Cl + SO_2 + HCl\). This substitution reaction produces gaseous byproducts (\(SO_2\) and \(HCl\)), meaning a significant mass of the reactants becomes waste. Thus, it exhibits poor atom economy.

(D) Catalytic hydrogenation of phenol: \(C_6H_5OH + 3H_2 \rightarrow C_6H_{11}OH\). This is an addition reaction with 100% atom economy.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The action of thionyl chloride on ethanol produces significant waste, so it does not exhibit good atom economy.
Quick Tip: Addition and rearrangement reactions generally have maximum (100%) atom economy.
Substitution and elimination reactions typically have lower atom economy because they inherently produce byproducts alongside the main product.


Question 20:

Calculate activation energy for a reaction if it's rate doubles when temperature is raised from \(20^\circC\) to \(35^\circC \left( R = 8.314 J K^{-1} mol^{-1} \right)\)

  • (A) \(17.336 kJ\)
  • (B) \(26.900 kJ\)
  • (C) \(34.673 kJ\)
  • (D) \(44.236 kJ\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(34.673 \text{ kJ}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The effect of temperature on the rate constant is given by the Arrhenius equation.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the logarithmic form of the Arrhenius equation for two temperatures:
\[ \log\left(\frac{k_2}{k_1}\right) = \frac{E_a}{2.303 R} \left[ \frac{T_2 - T_1}{T_1 T_2} \right] \]
Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given that the rate doubles, the ratio of rate constants \(\frac{k_2}{k_1} = 2\).

Initial temperature, \(T_1 = 20^\circC = 293 K\).

Final temperature, \(T_2 = 35^\circC = 308 K\).

Universal gas constant, \(R = 8.314 J K^{-1} mol^{-1}\).

Substitute the values into the equation:
\[ \log(2) = \frac{E_a}{2.303 \times 8.314} \left[ \frac{308 - 293}{293 \times 308} \right] \] \[ 0.3010 = \frac{E_a}{19.147} \left[ \frac{15}{90244} \right] \]
Rearrange to solve for \(E_a\):
\[ E_a = \frac{0.3010 \times 19.147 \times 90244}{15} \] \[ E_a = \frac{5.763 \times 90244}{15} \] \[ E_a \approx 34673 J mol^{-1} \]
Convert Joules to kilojoules by dividing by 1000:
\[ E_a \approx 34.673 kJ mol^{-1} \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The activation energy is \(34.673 kJ\).
Quick Tip: Always convert temperatures to Kelvin before using the Arrhenius equation.
A common rule of thumb is that the rate doubles for every \(10^\circC\) rise near room temp if \(E_a \approx 50 kJ/mol\). Here it takes a \(15^\circC\) rise to double, implying a lower \(E_a\) (\(\approx 35 kJ/mol\)).


Question 21:

What is the formal charge present on oxygen atom (numbered 1) in Lewis structure of \(CO_2\) ?

  • (A) 0
  • (B) -1
  • (C) +1
  • (D) -2
Correct Answer: (C) +1
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The formal charge of an atom in a molecule evaluates the distribution of electrons in specific resonance structures.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the formal charge formula:
\(FC = Valence electrons - Non-bonding electrons - \frac{Bonding electrons}{2}\)

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The image provides a minor resonance structure: \(:O \equiv C - \ddot{O}:\)

Assuming atom 1 refers to the leftmost oxygen (as is conventional when numbering atoms in a drawn sequence):

The left oxygen atom (\(:O\equiv\)) is involved in a triple bond.

- Valence electrons for Neutral Oxygen (\(V\)) = 6.

- Non-bonding electrons (\(N\), the two dots) = 2.

- Bonding electrons (\(B\), from the triple bond, 3 lines \(\times\) 2) = 6.

Substitute these into the formula:
\[ FC_{left} = 6 - 2 - \frac{6}{2} \] \[ FC_{left} = 6 - 2 - 3 = +1 \]
For completeness, the right oxygen (\(-\ddot{O}:\)):
\(FC_{right} = 6 - 6 - \frac{2}{2} = -1\).

Since \(+1\) is standard for the triply bonded oxygen in this structure, it matches option (C).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The formal charge on the triply bonded oxygen is \(+1\).
Quick Tip: A quick way to find formal charge is to compare the atom's typical bonding pattern.
Oxygen normally forms 2 bonds to be neutral. If it forms 3 bonds, it has a \(+1\) charge. If it forms 1 bond, it has a \(-1\) charge.


Question 22:

Which among the following is a monomer of natural rubber?

  • (A) 2-Methyl-1, 3-butadiene
  • (B) 1,1,2,2-Tetrafluoroethene
  • (C) 2-Chloro-1, 3 butadiene
  • (D) 1,3-butadiene
Correct Answer: (A) 2-Methyl-1, 3-butadiene
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Natural rubber is an elastomer obtained from the latex of rubber trees. It is a linear polymer built from a specific diene monomer.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the common name of the natural rubber monomer and match it to its systematic IUPAC nomenclature.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The common name for the monomer of natural rubber is isoprene.

Structurally, isoprene is a 4-carbon conjugated diene with a methyl group on the second carbon.

Its chemical structure is \(CH_2=C(CH_3)-CH=CH_2\).

Applying IUPAC nomenclature rules:

The longest chain containing the double bonds has 4 carbons (butadiene).

The double bonds are at positions 1 and 3 (1,3-butadiene).

There is a methyl substituent on carbon 2.

Thus, the IUPAC name is 2-Methyl-1,3-butadiene.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The monomer is 2-Methyl-1,3-butadiene.
Quick Tip: Memorizing common monomers and their corresponding polymers is crucial.
Isoprene \(\rightarrow\) Natural Rubber
Chloroprene \(\rightarrow\) Neoprene
Tetrafluoroethene \(\rightarrow\) Teflon


Question 23:

Identify the product obtained when alkyl alkanoate is hydrolysed with dilute \(HCl\).

  • (A) Alkanol and Alkanoic acid
  • (B) Alkanal and Alkanone
  • (C) Alkanone and Alkanoic acid
  • (D) Alkanol and Alkanal
Correct Answer: (A) Alkanol and Alkanoic acid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

"Alkyl alkanoate" is the systematic IUPAC nomenclature for an ester.

Esters undergo hydrolysis when heated with water in the presence of an acid catalyst (like dilute \(HCl\)).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Write the general chemical equation for acid-catalyzed ester hydrolysis to determine the functional groups of the products.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The general chemical equation is:
\[ R-COO-R' + H_2O \xrightleftharpoons{dil. HCl} R-COOH + R'-OH \]
The reactant \(R-COO-R'\) is the ester (alkyl alkanoate).

During acid hydrolysis, the ester bond is cleaved.

The acyl group (\(R-CO-\)) gains an \(-OH\) from water to form a carboxylic acid (\(R-COOH\)), systematically named as an alkanoic acid.

The alkoxy group (\(-OR'\)) gains an \(-H\) from water to form an alcohol (\(R'-OH\)), systematically named as an alkanol.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The products are an alkanol and an alkanoic acid.
Quick Tip: Acidic hydrolysis of esters yields an acid and an alcohol and is an equilibrium process.
Basic hydrolysis (saponification) yields the salt of the carboxylic acid (alkanoate) and an alcohol, and the reaction is irreversible.


Question 24:

Which of the following changes exhibit that nitrogen undergoes oxidation?

  • (A) \(NH_4^+ \rightarrow N_2\)
  • (B) \(NO_3^- \rightarrow NO\)
  • (C) \(NO_2 \rightarrow NO_2^-\)
  • (D) \(NO_3^- \rightarrow NH_4^+\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(\text{NH}_4^+ \rightarrow \text{N}_2\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In redox chemistry, a substance undergoes oxidation if its oxidation number increases during a reaction. Conversely, a decrease in oxidation number indicates reduction.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Calculate the oxidation state (OS) of nitrogen in the reactant and product for each given option and look for an increase.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the oxidation number of Nitrogen be \(x\).

(A) \(NH_4^+ \rightarrow N_2\): In \(NH_4^+\), \(x + 4(+1) = +1 \implies x = -3\). In \(N_2\) (elemental state), \(x = 0\). The OS changes from \(-3\) to \(0\). This is an increase, so it represents oxidation.

(B) \(NO_3^- \rightarrow NO\): In \(NO_3^-\), \(x + 3(-2) = -1 \implies x = +5\). In \(NO\), \(x + (-2) = 0 \implies x = +2\). The OS changes from \(+5\) to \(+2\) (reduction).

(C) \(NO_2 \rightarrow NO_2^-\): In \(NO_2\), \(x + 2(-2) = 0 \implies x = +4\). In \(NO_2^-\), \(x + 2(-2) = -1 \implies x = +3\). The OS changes from \(+4\) to \(+3\) (reduction).

(D) \(NO_3^- \rightarrow NH_4^+\): The OS changes from \(+5\) to \(-3\) (strong reduction).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The conversion of \(NH_4^+\) to \(N_2\) exhibits oxidation.
Quick Tip: To quickly find the oxidation state of the central atom in oxoanions, remember oxygen is usually -2. Total charge = sum of oxidation states.
Oxidation is the 'Loss of Electrons' (LEO), which corresponds to a more positive oxidation state.


Question 25:

The molar conductivity of \(0.02 moldm^{-3}\) solution of sodium hydroxide is \(230.5 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^2 mol^{-1}\). What is it's conductivity?

  • (A) \(0.01155 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^{-1}\)
  • (B) \(0.02308 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^{-1}\)
  • (C) \(0.00461 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^{-1}\)
  • (D) \(0.05613 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^{-1}\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(0.00461 \, \Omega^{-1} \text{ cm}^{-1}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_m\)) is related to the specific conductivity (\(\kappa\)) and the concentration of the solution.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

The relationship is given by the formula:
\[ \Lambda_m = \frac{\kappa \times 1000}{M} \]
Where \(\Lambda_m\) is in \(\Omega^{-1} cm^2 mol^{-1}\), \(\kappa\) is in \(\Omega^{-1} cm^{-1}\), and \(M\) is molarity in \(mol dm^{-3}\).

Rearrange the formula to solve for \(\kappa\):
\[ \kappa = \frac{\Lambda_m \times M}{1000} \]
Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given values are:
\(\Lambda_m = 230.5 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^2 mol^{-1}\)
\(M = 0.02 mol dm^{-3}\)

Substitute these into the rearranged formula:
\[ \kappa = \frac{230.5 \times 0.02}{1000} \] \[ \kappa = \frac{4.61}{1000} \] \[ \kappa = 0.00461 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^{-1} \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The conductivity is \(0.00461 \, \Omega^{-1} cm^{-1}\).
Quick Tip: Always double-check units in electrochemistry problems.
The factor '1000' in the numerator of \(\Lambda_m = (\kappa \times 1000)/M\) serves to convert the volume from liters (\(dm^3\)) into \(cm^3\) to match the units of \(\Lambda_m\).


Question 26:

Calculate the volume occupied by particle in simple cubic unit cell if volume of unit cell is \(5.5 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\).

  • (A) \(2.88 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\)
  • (B) \(1.87 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\)
  • (C) \(1.02 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\)
  • (D) \(3.44 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(2.88 \times 10^{-22} \text{ cm}^3\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The packing efficiency relates the volume of the unit cell to the actual volume occupied by the spherical particles within it.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

For a simple cubic (SC) unit cell, the packing efficiency (or packing fraction) is exactly \(\frac{\pi}{6}\), which is approximately \(52.4%\).

Use the relation: \(V_{occupied} = V_{total} \times Packing Fraction\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given the total volume of the unit cell, \(V_{total} = 5.5 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\).

The packing fraction for a simple cubic cell is \(\frac{\pi}{6} \approx 0.5236\).

Calculate the occupied volume:
\[ V_{occupied} = 5.5 \times 10^{-22} \times \frac{\pi}{6} \] \[ V_{occupied} = 5.5 \times 10^{-22} \times 0.5236 \] \[ V_{occupied} \approx 2.8798 \times 10^{-22} cm^3 \]
Rounding to the appropriate significant figures gives \(2.88 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The volume occupied by the particle is \(2.88 \times 10^{-22} cm^3\).
Quick Tip: Memorize the packing efficiencies for the three main cubic lattices:
Simple Cubic (SC): \(\sim 52.4%\) (\(\pi/6\))
Body-Centered Cubic (BCC): \(\sim 68%\) (\(\sqrt{3}\pi/8\))
Face-Centered Cubic (FCC): \(\sim 74%\) (\(\sqrt{2}\pi/6\))


Question 27:

Which of the following is primary benzylic alcohol?

  • (A)
  • (B)
  • (C)
  • (D)
Correct Answer: (D) Image showing a benzene ring attached to \(-\text{CH}_2-\text{OH}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A benzylic alcohol has an \(-OH\) group attached to a saturated carbon atom that is directly bonded to an aromatic ring.

A primary (\(1^\circ\)) alcohol is one where the carbon atom bonded to the \(-OH\) group is attached to only one other carbon atom.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Combine the definitions: A primary benzylic alcohol must have the generic structure \(Ar-CH_2-OH\). Evaluate the structures in the options against this requirement.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Structure is \(C_6H_5-CH(OH)-CH_3\). The carbon holding \(-OH\) is attached to two other carbons (the ring and a methyl). It is a secondary (\(2^\circ\)) benzylic alcohol.

(B) Structure is \(C_6H_5-C(CH_3)_2OH\). The carbon holding \(-OH\) is attached to three other carbons. It is a tertiary (\(3^\circ\)) benzylic alcohol.

(C) Structure is \(C_6H_5-CH_2-CH_2-OH\). The carbon holding \(-OH\) is not directly attached to the benzene ring. It is a primary alcohol, but not benzylic.

(D) Structure is \(C_6H_5-CH_2-OH\) (Benzyl alcohol). The carbon holding \(-OH\) is directly attached to the ring and no other carbons. It is a primary (\(1^\circ\)) benzylic alcohol.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (D) represents a primary benzylic alcohol.
Quick Tip: To classify alcohols, locate the carbon attached to the -OH group.
Count how many other carbon atoms are directly attached to that specific carbon. 1 = primary, 2 = secondary, 3 = tertiary.


Question 28:

Which from following elements is a decay product of thorium?

  • (A) S
  • (B) Se
  • (C) Po
  • (D) Te
Correct Answer: (C) Po
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Heavy radioactive elements like Thorium and Uranium decay through a long series of alpha and beta emissions to eventually form stable isotopes of lead.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify which of the given elements falls within the atomic number range of heavy metal decay series intermediates (typically elements from atomic numbers 81 to 90).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The Thorium decay series begins with Thorium-232 and ends with stable Lead-208.

During this sequence, the atoms transition through intermediate elements including Radium (Ra), Actinium (Ac), Radon (Rn), Polonium (Po), Bismuth (Bi), and Thallium (Tl).

Among the options provided (Sulfur, Selenium, Polonium, Tellurium), only Polonium (Po, atomic number 84) is a heavy element formed in these decay chains.

The other elements (S, Se, Te) are lighter chalcogens and do not participate in heavy metal decay series.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Polonium (Po) is a decay product of thorium.
Quick Tip: A good general rule is that the natural decay series of heavy actinide elements primarily produce elements with atomic numbers between 81 (Tl) and 90 (Th).
Polonium (\(Z=84\)) is a classic radioactive intermediate in these series.


Question 29:

If half life of a first order reaction is 10 minutes, find the time required to decrease concentration of reactant from \(0.08 M\) to \(0.02 M\).

  • (A) 10 minutes
  • (B) 20 minutes
  • (C) 30 minutes
  • (D) 40 minutes
Correct Answer: (B) 20 minutes
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

For a first-order reaction, the half-life (\(t_{1/2}\)) is constant, meaning the concentration of the reactant halves after every regular interval of 10 minutes, regardless of the starting concentration.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the relation \([A]_t = [A]_0 \times (1/2)^n\), where \(n\) is the number of half-lives. Alternatively, trace the halving steps manually.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's trace the concentration drop half-life by half-life:

Start: Concentration = \(0.08 M\).

After 1 half-life (10 mins): Concentration halves to \(0.04 M\).

After 2 half-lives (another 10 mins): Concentration halves again to \(0.02 M\).

The target concentration of \(0.02 M\) is reached after exactly 2 half-lives.

Total time = Number of half-lives \(\times\) duration of one half-life.

Total time = \(2 \times 10 minutes = 20 minutes\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The time required is 20 minutes.
Quick Tip: For first-order reactions, if the final concentration is a simple fraction like \(1/2, 1/4, 1/8\) of the initial concentration, just count the number of times you must divide by 2.
Here \(0.08 \rightarrow 0.04 \rightarrow 0.02\) is two steps, so the time is \(2 \times t_{1/2}\).


Question 30:

Calculate the pOH of buffer solution formed from \(0.3 M\) weak base and \(0.45 M\) of its salt with strong acid [\(pK_b = 4.7447\)]

  • (A) 6.45
  • (B) 4.07
  • (C) 4.92
  • (D) 5.51
Correct Answer: (C) 4.92
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A solution containing a weak base and its salt forms a basic buffer.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation for a basic buffer to find the pOH:
\[ pOH = pK_b + \log \left( \frac{[Salt]}{[Base]} \right) \]
Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given values are:
\(pK_b = 4.7447\)
\([Base] = 0.3 M\)
\([Salt] = 0.45 M\)

Substitute the values into the equation:
\[ pOH = 4.7447 + \log \left( \frac{0.45}{0.3} \right) \]
Simplify the fraction: \(\frac{0.45}{0.3} = 1.5\).
\[ pOH = 4.7447 + \log(1.5) \]
Calculate the value of \(\log(1.5)\). Knowing \(\log(1.5) = \log(3/2) = \log(3) - \log(2) \approx 0.477 - 0.301 = 0.176\).
\[ pOH = 4.7447 + 0.176 \] \[ pOH = 4.9207 \]
Rounding to the matching option gives 4.92.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The pOH of the buffer solution is 4.92.
Quick Tip: Memorize a few basic log values to speed up calculations without a calculator: \(\log(2) \approx 0.30\), \(\log(3) \approx 0.48\).
This allows you to quickly estimate intermediate values like \(\log(1.5) \approx 0.18\).


Question 31:

Which from following complexes is having ambidentate ligand in it?

  • (A) Sodium hexafluoroaluminate(III)
  • (B) Pentaaquaisothiocyanatoiron(III) ion
  • (C) Hexacyanoferrate(II) ion
  • (D) Trioxalatocobaltate(III) ion
Correct Answer: (B) Pentaaquaisothiocyanatoiron(III) ion
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

An ambidentate ligand is a unidentate ligand that has more than one potential donor atom, allowing it to coordinate to the central metal in more than one way (linkage isomerism).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the ligands present in each complex name and check if any fall into the category of common ambidentate ligands (like \(-SCN\), \(-NO_2\), \(-CN\)).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Sodium hexafluoroaluminate(III): Ligand is fluoride (\(F^-\)), which has only one type of donor atom.

(B) Pentaaquaisothiocyanatoiron(III) ion: Ligands are water and isothiocyanate. The thiocyanate ion (\(SCN^-\)) can bind through Sulfur (thiocyanato) or Nitrogen (isothiocyanato). Because it has two different bonding modes, it is a classic ambidentate ligand.

(C) Hexacyanoferrate(II) ion: Ligand is cyanide (\(CN^-\)). While potentially ambidentate, in typical nomenclature, stating "isothiocyanato" explicitly highlights the ambidentate nature being tested.

(D) Trioxalatocobaltate(III) ion: Ligand is oxalate, which is a bidentate ligand, not ambidentate.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Option (B) contains the ambidentate isothiocyanato ligand.
Quick Tip: When asked to identify an ambidentate ligand, look for the "big three": \(-SCN\) / \(-NCS\) (thiocyanato/isothiocyanato), \(-NO_2\) / \(-ONO\) (nitro/nitrito), and \(-CN\) / \(-NC\) (cyano/isocyano).


Question 32:

What is the minimum number of spheres required to develop an octahedral void?

  • (A) 2
  • (B) 4
  • (C) 6
  • (D) 8
Correct Answer: (C) 6
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In close-packed structures (like ccp or hcp), empty spaces called voids are left between the packed spheres.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall the geometric definition of an octahedral void in a crystal lattice.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

An octahedral void is formed when the triangular depression formed by three close-packed spheres in one layer aligns with a similar depression pointing in the opposite direction formed by three spheres in the adjacent layer.

It is thus surrounded by three spheres in the lower plane and three spheres in the upper plane.

Total spheres = \(3 + 3 = 6\).

The centers of these six spheres form a regular octahedron, hence the name.

Step 4: Final Answer:

It requires a minimum of 6 spheres to develop an octahedral void.
Quick Tip: The name of the void indicates the geometry of the surrounding spheres' centers, NOT the number of spheres.
A tetrahedron has 4 vertices (4 spheres make a tetrahedral void).
An octahedron has 6 vertices (6 spheres make an octahedral void).


Question 33:

How many moles of iodomethane are consumed in the following conversion?
\(CH_3NH_2 \xrightarrow[\Delta]{CH_3I} (CH_3)_4N^+ I^-\)

  • (A) Four
  • (B) Three
  • (C) Two
  • (D) One
Correct Answer: (B) Three
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The reaction shows exhaustive methylation of an amine, where the nucleophilic nitrogen attacks iodomethane successively until it forms a quaternary ammonium salt.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Count the number of hydrogen atoms on the starting amine nitrogen and realize it will be replaced by methyl groups, plus one final alkylation on the lone pair.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The starting material is methylamine (\(CH_3NH_2\)), a primary amine, which has 1 methyl group and 2 hydrogens on the nitrogen.

The final product is tetramethylammonium iodide, \((CH_3)_4N^+I^-\), which has 4 methyl groups attached to the nitrogen.

Each reaction with iodomethane (\(CH_3I\)) adds one methyl group.

Number of methyl groups added = (Final methyl groups) - (Initial methyl groups) = \(4 - 1 = 3\).

Therefore, 3 moles of iodomethane are consumed to complete the conversion.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Three moles of iodomethane are consumed.
Quick Tip: For exhaustive alkylation to a quaternary ammonium salt, just count the number of hydrogens initially attached to the nitrogen atom plus the lone pair that accepts the final alkyl group.
A primary amine has 2 hydrogens + 1 lone pair = reacts with 3 moles of alkyl halide.


Question 34:

Identify the use of calcium carbonate from following.

  • (A) For mercerising cotton fabrics.
  • (B) As a source of hydride.
  • (C) As chlorinating agent.
  • (D) In tooth paste.
Correct Answer: (D) In tooth paste.
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Chemical compounds of s-block elements have distinct industrial and commercial applications based on their physical and chemical properties.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate each listed application against the known properties of calcium carbonate (\(CaCO_3\)).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Mercerising cotton fabrics uses concentrated Sodium Hydroxide (\(NaOH\)), not \(CaCO_3\).

(B) \(CaCO_3\) contains no hydrogen and cannot act as a source of hydride (\(H^-\)). Calcium hydride (\(CaH_2\)) is used for this.

(C) \(CaCO_3\) contains no chlorine and cannot act as a chlorinating agent.

(D) Calcium carbonate is a mild, water-insoluble abrasive. It is widely used in toothpaste formulations to help mechanically remove dental plaque and surface stains without severely damaging tooth enamel.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Calcium carbonate is used in toothpaste.
Quick Tip: Many common s-block compounds have specific everyday uses that are frequently tested.
\(CaCO_3\) \(\rightarrow\) marble, chalk, toothpaste abrasive.
\(NaHCO_3\) \(\rightarrow\) baking soda.
\(NaOH\) \(\rightarrow\) soap making, mercerizing cotton.


Question 35:

Which of the following acid strength is used to get good yield of alkyl iodide from alcohol and sodium iodide in phosphoric acid?

  • (A) 15%
  • (B) 35%
  • (C) 65%
  • (D) 95%
Correct Answer: (D) 95%
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Alcohols can be converted to alkyl iodides by reacting them with an alkali metal iodide (like NaI or KI) in the presence of an acid. The acid protonates the alcohol to make water a good leaving group.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the specific acid and concentration standardly used for this reaction to prevent unwanted side reactions.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Concentrated sulfuric acid cannot be used here because it acts as an oxidizing agent and oxidizes the iodide ion (\(I^-\)) to iodine gas (\(I_2\)), resulting in low yields of alkyl iodide.

Instead, phosphoric acid (\(H_3PO_4\)) is used because it provides the necessary acidic medium but is non-oxidizing.

To ensure sufficient protonation and to drive the equilibrium forward by minimizing water content, a highly concentrated solution of phosphoric acid is required.

Standard laboratory procedures use 95% orthophosphoric acid for optimal yields.

Step 4: Final Answer:

An acid strength of 95% is used.
Quick Tip: Remember: For making alkyl iodides from alcohols + NaI, use \(H_3PO_4\) (95%), NOT conc. \(H_2SO_4\).
However, for making alkyl chlorides or bromides, conc. \(H_2SO_4\) can be used as \(Cl^-\) and \(Br^-\) are harder to oxidize than \(I^-\).


Question 36:

Identify false statement about transition elements.

  • (A) As per IUPAC convention, transition metal atom have incomplete d-subshell.
  • (B) 6d-series includes all elements from \(Ac(Z = 89)\) to \(Cn(Z = 112)\).
  • (C) These elements are placed in group 3 to 12 in modern periodic table.
  • (D) In these \((n-1)\) d-orbital is filled successively.
Correct Answer: (B) 6d-series includes all elements from \(\text{Ac}(Z = 89)\) to \(\text{Cn}(Z = 112)\).
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Transition elements occupy the d-block of the periodic table, characterized by the progressive filling of inner (n-1)d orbitals.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Review the IUPAC definition of transition elements and verify their designated positions and series boundaries in the periodic table.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) The IUPAC defines a transition element as one that has an incompletely filled d sub-shell in its neutral or cationic state. This is TRUE.

(C) The d-block elements strictly occupy Groups 3 through 12. This is TRUE.

(D) The defining characteristic of the d-block is the successive filling of the \((n-1)\)d orbitals. This is TRUE.

(B) Let's examine the 6d series. It begins with Actinium (\(Ac, Z=89\)). After Ac, the 5f subshell begins to fill, creating the actinide series from Thorium (\(Z=90\)) to Lawrencium (\(Z=103\)). These are f-block elements. The filling of the 6d orbitals only resumes with Rutherfordium (\(Z=104\)) and continues to Copernicium (\(Z=112\)). Therefore, stating the 6d series includes "all elements from Ac to Cn" incorrectly encompasses the f-block actinides. This statement is FALSE.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Statement (B) is the false statement.
Quick Tip: Pay attention to the gaps in atomic numbers in the d-block series.
The 5d series skips the lanthanides (\(Z=58-71\)), and the 6d series skips the actinides (\(Z=90-103\)).


Question 37:

Which from following terms is explained by first law of thermodynamics?

  • (A) Entropy
  • (B) Free energy
  • (C) Conservation of energy
  • (D) Enthalpy
Correct Answer: (C) Conservation of energy
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The laws of thermodynamics establish the fundamental rules governing energy and its transformations.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Match the fundamental laws of thermodynamics to the specific concepts they define.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The First Law of Thermodynamics states that energy can be transformed from one form to another, but it cannot be created or destroyed.

This is fundamentally a statement of the principle of the conservation of energy. It introduces the concept of internal energy.

(A) Entropy is introduced and explained by the Second Law of Thermodynamics.

(B) Free energy integrates concepts from both the first and second laws to predict spontaneity.

(D) Enthalpy is a defined state function derived from internal energy and pressure-volume work, but the "law" itself embodies energy conservation.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The First Law of Thermodynamics explains the conservation of energy.
Quick Tip: Match laws to their core concepts:
0th Law \(\rightarrow\) Thermal equilibrium / Temperature.
1st Law \(\rightarrow\) Conservation of energy / Internal energy.
2nd Law \(\rightarrow\) Entropy / Direction of spontaneity.
3rd Law \(\rightarrow\) Absolute zero entropy.


Question 38:

Calculate degree of dissociation of a weak monobasic acid in \(0.01 M\) solution if dissociation constant is \(1.6 \times 10^{-5}\).

  • (A) 0.02
  • (B) 0.03
  • (C) 0.04
  • (D) 0.05
Correct Answer: (C) 0.04
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The degree of dissociation (\(\alpha\)) of a weak electrolyte relates how much of the substance breaks apart into ions compared to the initial concentration.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use Ostwald's dilution law for a weak monobasic acid: \(K_a = \frac{C \alpha^2}{1 - \alpha}\).

For weak acids where \(\alpha\) is very small, we approximate \((1 - \alpha) \approx 1\), leading to the simplified formula \(\alpha = \sqrt{\frac{K_a}{C}}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given dissociation constant, \(K_a = 1.6 \times 10^{-5}\).

Given concentration, \(C = 0.01 M = 10^{-2} M\).

Substitute the values into the simplified formula:
\[ \alpha = \sqrt{\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-5}}{10^{-2}}} \] \[ \alpha = \sqrt{1.6 \times 10^{-3}} \]
Adjust the decimal to make the exponent an even number for easy square rooting:
\[ \alpha = \sqrt{16 \times 10^{-4}} \] \[ \alpha = \sqrt{16} \times \sqrt{10^{-4}} \] \[ \alpha = 4 \times 10^{-2} \] \[ \alpha = 0.04 \]
Since \(\alpha = 0.04\) is small (\(\le 0.05\)), the approximation used is valid.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The degree of dissociation is 0.04.
Quick Tip: Always try the simplified formula \(\alpha = \sqrt{K_a/C}\) first.
If the resulting \(\alpha\) is greater than \(\approx 0.05\) (5%), you should ideally solve the full quadratic equation for a precise answer.


Question 39:

Which from following is an example of solution of solid as solute and liquid as solvent?

  • (A) Sea water
  • (B) Brass
  • (C) Gasoline
  • (D) Iodine in air
Correct Answer: (A) Sea water
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A solution is a homogeneous mixture of two or more substances. The physical state of the solution is determined by the solvent.

The question asks for a "solid in liquid" type of solution.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the physical states of the components in each given mixture option.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Sea water: It consists of various dissolved salts (which are solids, like \(NaCl\)) distributed homogeneously in water (which is a liquid). This is a solid in liquid solution.

(B) Brass: This is an alloy made of zinc dissolved in copper. Both components are solids, so it is a solid in solid solution.

(C) Gasoline: It is a homogeneous mixture of various liquid hydrocarbons. It is a liquid in liquid solution.

(D) Iodine in air: This refers to iodine vapor mixed with air. Both are gases, making it a gas in gas mixture.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Sea water is an example of a solid solute in a liquid solvent.
Quick Tip: Know the common examples for all 9 types of solutions (solid, liquid, gas dissolved in solid, liquid, gas).
Examples like amalgam (liquid in solid), aerated drinks (gas in liquid), and alloys (solid in solid) are frequently tested.


Question 40:

Identify the coordination number of aluminium in potassium trioxalatoaluminate(III).

  • (A) 2
  • (B) 4
  • (C) 6
  • (D) 12
Correct Answer: (C) 6
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The coordination number of a central metal ion in a complex is the total number of coordinate covalent bonds it forms with the surrounding ligands.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Determine the formula from the IUPAC name, identify the ligands and their denticity, then calculate Coordination Number = (Number of ligands) \(\times\) (Denticity).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The complex is named "potassium trioxalatoaluminate(III)".

The central metal is Aluminium (\(Al^{3+}\)).

The ligand is the "oxalato" group, derived from the oxalate ion (\(C_2O_4^{2-}\)).

The prefix "tri" indicates there are 3 oxalate ligands present.

The oxalate ion is a bidentate ligand, meaning each single oxalate ion forms two separate coordinate bonds with the central metal using two different oxygen atoms.

Calculate the coordination number:

Coordination Number = \(3 ligands \times 2 bonds/ligand = 6\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The coordination number of aluminium is 6.
Quick Tip: Common bidentate ligands to remember: ethylenediamine (en), oxalate (\(ox\) or \(C_2O_4^{2-}\)), glycinate (gly).
For these, each ligand molecule contributes 2 to the coordination number.


Question 41:

Which of the following isomeric amines has the highest boiling point?

  • (A) tert-Butylamine
  • (B) Ethyldimethylamine
  • (C) Diethylamine
  • (D) n-Butylamine
Correct Answer: (D) n-Butylamine
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The boiling point of isomeric amines depends largely on intermolecular hydrogen bonding and van der Waals forces (surface area).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Compare the classification (\(1^\circ\), \(2^\circ\), \(3^\circ\)) of the amines to determine hydrogen bonding capability, and then look at the branching to assess surface area.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Primary (\(1^\circ\)) amines have two N-H bonds, allowing for extensive intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

Secondary (\(2^\circ\)) amines have only one N-H bond, so their hydrogen bonding is weaker.

Tertiary (\(3^\circ\)) amines have no N-H bonds and cannot form hydrogen bonds with themselves.

(B) Ethyldimethylamine is a tertiary (\(3^\circ\)) amine, so it has the lowest boiling point.

(C) Diethylamine is a secondary (\(2^\circ\)) amine, so it has a moderate boiling point.

(A) tert-Butylamine and (D) n-Butylamine are both primary (\(1^\circ\)) amines, so they have the highest capacity for hydrogen bonding among the options.

To distinguish between the two primary amines, we look at their shape.

n-Butylamine is a straight-chain molecule, which gives it a large surface area for stronger London dispersion forces.

tert-Butylamine is highly branched and compact, reducing its surface area and weakening dispersion forces.

Therefore, the straight-chain primary amine has the highest boiling point.

Step 4: Final Answer:

n-Butylamine has the highest boiling point.
Quick Tip: For isomeric amines, the order of boiling points is generally Primary > Secondary > Tertiary.
Within primary amines, straight chain > branched chain due to larger surface area for van der Waals interactions.


Question 42:

If A, B, C, D are four different elements with outer electronic configuration as
A = \(4s^2 4p^4\), B = \(4s^2 4p^5\), C = \(5s^2 5p^4\), D = \(5s^2 5p^5\).
Find the element having highest ionization enthalpy (\(\Delta_i H_1\))

  • (A) A
  • (B) B
  • (C) C
  • (D) D
Correct Answer: (B) B
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Ionization enthalpy (IE) is the energy required to remove an electron from a neutral gaseous atom.

IE generally increases across a period (left to right) and decreases down a group (top to bottom).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Determine the relative positions of the elements in the periodic table based on their principal quantum numbers (periods) and valence electrons (groups).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

- A: \(4s^2 4p^4\) corresponds to Period 4, Group 16.

- B: \(4s^2 4p^5\) corresponds to Period 4, Group 17.

- C: \(5s^2 5p^4\) corresponds to Period 5, Group 16.

- D: \(5s^2 5p^5\) corresponds to Period 5, Group 17.

Comparing across periods: B is to the right of A, so B > A. Similarly, D is to the right of C, so D > C.

Comparing down groups: B is above D in Group 17, so B > D. A is above C in Group 16, so A > C.

Therefore, element B, being the highest and furthest to the right among the choices, will experience the strongest effective nuclear charge on its valence electrons.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Element B has the highest ionization enthalpy.
Quick Tip: To quickly find the highest IE among a block of elements, look for the element in the top-right corner of that block.
Top-right means smallest atomic radius and highest effective nuclear charge.


Question 43:

What is the change in internal energy for \(2CO_{(g)} + O_{2(g)} \rightarrow 2CO_{2(g)}\) at \(25^\circC\) ?
( \(R = 8.314 J K^{-1} mol^{-1}\), \(\Delta H = -560 kJ\) )

  • (A) \(-557.5 kJ\)
  • (B) \(-530.0 kJ\)
  • (C) \(510.0 kJ\)
  • (D) \(656.9 kJ\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(-557.5 \text{ kJ}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The change in internal energy (\(\Delta U\)) of a reaction relates to the change in enthalpy (\(\Delta H\)) and the work done due to changes in gaseous moles.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the relation: \(\Delta H = \Delta U + \Delta n_g R T\), which rearranges to \(\Delta U = \Delta H - \Delta n_g R T\).

Calculate \(\Delta n_g\), which is the difference between moles of gaseous products and gaseous reactants.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The reaction is: \(2CO_{(g)} + 1O_{2(g)} \rightarrow 2CO_{2(g)}\).

Moles of gaseous products = \(2\).

Moles of gaseous reactants = \(2 + 1 = 3\).
\(\Delta n_g = 2 - 3 = -1 mol\).

Temperature \(T = 25^\circC = 25 + 273.15 = 298.15 K\) (using \(298 K\) for simplicity).

Since \(\Delta H\) is in kJ, convert \(R\) to kJ as well: \(R = 8.314 \times 10^{-3} kJ K^{-1} mol^{-1}\).

Substitute the values into the formula:
\[ \Delta U = -560 kJ - (-1) \times (8.314 \times 10^{-3} kJ K^{-1}) \times (298 K) \] \[ \Delta U = -560 + (1 \times 0.008314 \times 298) \] \[ \Delta U = -560 + 2.477 \] \[ \Delta U \approx -557.52 kJ \]
Rounding to one decimal place gives \(-557.5 kJ\).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The change in internal energy is \(-557.5 kJ\).
Quick Tip: The most common mistake here is mismatched units.
Since \(\Delta H\) is usually in kJ and \(R\) is given in J, you MUST convert one to match the other.
Calculating the \(RT\) term in kJ first is usually safest: \(RT \approx 2.5 kJ/mol\) at room temp (\(298 K\)).


Question 44:

Calculate the final pressure required to reduce the volume of a gas to one third, if initial pressure is \(1.6 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\).

  • (A) \(5.4 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\)
  • (B) \(1.6 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\)
  • (C) \(2.11 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\)
  • (D) \(4.8 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(4.8 \times 10^5 \text{ Nm}^{-2}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When the temperature and amount of gas remain constant, the relationship between pressure and volume is governed by Boyle's Law.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Boyle's Law states that pressure is inversely proportional to volume: \(P_1 V_1 = P_2 V_2\).

Rearrange to solve for the final pressure: \(P_2 = \frac{P_1 V_1}{V_2}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given initial pressure, \(P_1 = 1.6 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\).

Let the initial volume be \(V_1\).

The final volume is reduced to one third, so \(V_2 = \frac{1}{3} V_1\).

Substitute these values into the formula:
\[ P_2 = \frac{P_1 \times V_1}{\frac{1}{3} V_1} \]
The \(V_1\) terms cancel out, leaving:
\[ P_2 = P_1 \times 3 \] \[ P_2 = (1.6 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}) \times 3 \] \[ P_2 = 4.8 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2} \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The required final pressure is \(4.8 \times 10^5 Nm^{-2}\).
Quick Tip: Inverse proportionality means if one quantity is multiplied by a factor, the other is divided by the same factor.
If volume is divided by 3, pressure must be multiplied by 3. \(1.6 \times 3 = 4.8\).


Question 45:

If osmotic pressure of \(0.2 M\) aqueous glucose solution is \(5 atm\) at \(300 K\). Calculate the concentration of glucose solution having osmotic pressure \(2.5 atm\) at same temperature.

  • (A) \(0.1 M\)
  • (B) \(0.05 M\)
  • (C) \(0.75 M\)
  • (D) \(0.25 M\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(0.1 \text{ M}\)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The osmotic pressure (\(\pi\)) of a solution depends on the molar concentration of solute particles, temperature, and the ideal gas constant.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Use the van 't Hoff equation: \(\pi = C R T\).

Since \(R\) and \(T\) are constant across both cases, \(\pi\) is directly proportional to \(C\) (\(\pi \propto C\)).

Set up a ratio: \(\frac{\pi_1}{C_1} = \frac{\pi_2}{C_2}\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given values for the first solution:
\(C_1 = 0.2 M\)
\(\pi_1 = 5 atm\)

Given values for the second solution:
\(\pi_2 = 2.5 atm\)

Rearrange the ratio to solve for the unknown concentration \(C_2\):
\[ C_2 = C_1 \times \frac{\pi_2}{\pi_1} \]
Substitute the values:
\[ C_2 = 0.2 M \times \frac{2.5 atm}{5 atm} \] \[ C_2 = 0.2 \times \frac{1}{2} \] \[ C_2 = 0.1 M \]
Step 4: Final Answer:

The required concentration is \(0.1 M\).
Quick Tip: Look for direct proportionality relationships to save calculation time.
Here, the osmotic pressure halved (from \(5 atm\) to \(2.5 atm\)).
Since \(\pi = CRT\) and T is constant, the concentration must also halve. Half of \(0.2 M\) is \(0.1 M\).


Question 46:

What is the IUPAC name of following compound? .

  • (A) 3-Chloro-4-methyl-5-bromohept-1-ene
  • (B) 4-Methyl-3-bromo-5-chlorohept-6-ene
  • (C) 3-Bromo-4-methyl-5-chlorohept-6-ene
  • (D) 5-Bromo-3-chloro-4-methylhept-1-ene
Correct Answer: (D) 5-Bromo-3-chloro-4-methylhept-1-ene
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The IUPAC nomenclature requires identifying the longest continuous carbon chain containing the principal functional group, and then numbering it to give that group the lowest possible locant.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the parent alkene chain, determine the correct numbering direction to prioritize the double bond, and list substituents alphabetically.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The longest carbon chain containing the double bond has 7 carbon atoms, making the parent name "heptene".

Numbering the chain to give the double bond the lowest number means starting from the left side, so the double bond starts at C-1 (hept-1-ene).

Looking at the substituents based on this left-to-right numbering:

- At C-3, there is a Chlorine atom (3-chloro).

- At C-4, there is a Methyl group (4-methyl).

- At C-5, there is a Bromine atom (5-bromo).

Assemble the name by listing the substituents in alphabetical order (Bromo, Chloro, Methyl), regardless of their numerical locants.

This results in: 5-bromo-3-chloro-4-methylhept-1-ene.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The IUPAC name is 5-Bromo-3-chloro-4-methylhept-1-ene.
Quick Tip: Always prioritize the main functional group (alkene) for lowest numbering. Alkene > Halogens/Alkyls.
After determining the correct numbering, strictly follow alphabetical order for assembling the prefix list.


Question 47:

Which amino acid from following contains highest number of N atoms in it?

  • (A) Histidine
  • (B) Lysine
  • (C) Arginine
  • (D) Glutamine
Correct Answer: (C) Arginine
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

All standard amino acids have at least one nitrogen atom located in their \(\alpha\)-amino group. Any additional nitrogen atoms must be present in their distinct side chains (R groups).

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Recall the chemical structures of the side chains for each provided amino acid and count the total number of nitrogen atoms.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

(A) Histidine: The side chain contains an imidazole ring, which has 2 nitrogen atoms. Adding the \(\alpha\)-amino group gives a total of \(2 + 1 = 3\) Nitrogen atoms.

(B) Lysine: The side chain is an alkyl chain ending with a primary amino group. Adding the \(\alpha\)-amino group gives \(1 + 1 = 2\) Nitrogen atoms.

(C) Arginine: The side chain ends in a guanidino group, which contains 3 nitrogen atoms. Adding the \(\alpha\)-amino group gives a total of \(3 + 1 = 4\) Nitrogen atoms.

(D) Glutamine: The side chain contains an amide group, which has 1 nitrogen atom. Adding the \(\alpha\)-amino group gives \(1 + 1 = 2\) Nitrogen atoms.

Comparing the totals, Arginine has the most.

Step 4: Final Answer:

Arginine contains the highest number of nitrogen atoms (4).
Quick Tip: Arginine is often the most basic amino acid due to its highly basic guanidino group, which also makes it the most nitrogen-rich standard amino acid.


Question 48:

Identify the reagent 'R' necessary to bring the following conversion.

  • (A) \(H_2O\)
  • (B) \(CrO_3\)
  • (C) \(NaOH\) (dil.)
  • (D) \(KMnO_4\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\text{NaOH}\) (dil.)
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The reaction shown involves replacing a chlorine atom directly attached to a benzene ring with a hydroxyl (\(-OH\)) group.

This is a Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution (\(S_NAr\)) reaction.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Identify the conditions required for \(S_NAr\). An electron-withdrawing group (like the carbonyl group shown) at the ortho position strongly activates the ring, allowing substitution by a strong nucleophile under relatively mild conditions.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Normally, aryl halides are unreactive towards nucleophilic substitution. However, the reactant is 2-chlorobenzophenone, which has a strong electron-withdrawing carbonyl group ortho to the chlorine.

This carbonyl group stabilizes the intermediate carbanion (Meisenheimer complex) formed during the attack.

To achieve the conversion to a phenol derivative, a source of hydroxide (\(OH^-\)) nucleophile is required.

(A) Water is too weak of a nucleophile to execute this substitution efficiently.

(B) and (D) \(CrO_3\) and \(KMnO_4\) are strong oxidizing agents, not nucleophiles.

(C) Dilute \(NaOH\) provides the necessary strong hydroxide nucleophile to displace the chlorine atom activated by the ortho-carbonyl group.

Step 4: Final Answer:

The necessary reagent is \(NaOH\) (dil.).
Quick Tip: Nucleophilic aromatic substitution requires a good nucleophile (like \(NaOH\)) and is vastly accelerated by electron-withdrawing groups (\(-NO_2, -C=O\)) at ortho or para positions relative to the leaving group.


Question 49:

Identify 'A' in the following reaction.

  • (A) Acrylic acid
  • (B) Oxalic acid
  • (C) Salicylic acid
  • (D) Phthalic acid
Correct Answer: (C) Salicylic acid
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Aspirin is a well-known medicinal compound whose chemical name is acetylsalicylic acid.

Its synthesis involves an esterification reaction where an alcohol/phenol group reacts with an acid anhydride.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Work backwards from the structure of Aspirin to identify its precursor molecules in the acetylation reaction.

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The reaction shows that substance 'A' reacts with acetic anhydride to form Aspirin.

The role of acetic anhydride is to act as an acetylating agent, which transfers an acetyl group (\(CH_3CO-\)) to a hydroxyl group.

Because Aspirin is acetylsalicylic acid, the original hydroxyl group must be present on a salicylic acid framework.

The structural equation is:
\(Salicylic acid + Acetic anhydride \xrightarrow{H^+} Acetylsalicylic acid (Aspirin) + Acetic acid\).

Therefore, the reactant 'A' must be salicylic acid (2-hydroxybenzoic acid).

Step 4: Final Answer:

The starting material 'A' is Salicylic acid.
Quick Tip: Aspirin synthesis is a classic "name reaction" type process to memorize.
Aspirin = Acetylsalicylic acid.
Therefore, the starting material is Salicylic acid (2-hydroxybenzoic acid) undergoing acetylation.


Question 50:

What are the possible values of magnetic quantum number for \(p\) orbital?

  • (A) 2
  • (B) 3
  • (C) 5
  • (D) 6
Correct Answer: (B) 3
View Solution



Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Quantum numbers describe the state of an electron in an atom.

The magnetic quantum number (\(m_l\)) determines the number of specific spatial orientations available for an orbital type.

Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Determine the azimuthal quantum number (\(l\)) for a \(p\) orbital, and then use the rule that \(m_l\) can take integer values from \(-l\) to \(+l\). The total number of values is \(2l + 1\).

Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For a given subshell, the azimuthal quantum number \(l\) dictates the orbital shape:
\(s\) orbital \(\rightarrow l = 0\)
\(p\) orbital \(\rightarrow l = 1\)
\(d\) orbital \(\rightarrow l = 2\)

For a \(p\) orbital, the value of \(l\) is 1.

The magnetic quantum number \(m_l\) can take integral values ranging from \(-l\) to \(+l\), including zero.

Since \(l = 1\), the possible values for \(m_l\) are \(-1, 0, +1\).

Counting these discrete values, there are exactly 3 possible values (which correspond to the \(p_x, p_y\), and \(p_z\) orbitals).

Step 4: Final Answer:

There are 3 possible values for the magnetic quantum number of a \(p\) orbital.
Quick Tip: The total number of possible \(m_l\) values for a given \(l\) is calculated by the formula \(2l + 1\).
For a \(p\) orbital (\(l=1\)), the number of values is \(2(1) + 1 = 3\).


Physics

Question 1:

Water is flowing through a horizontal pipe in a streamline flow. At the narrowest part of the pipe

  • (A) velocity is maximum and pressure is minimum.
  • (B) pressure is maximum and velocity is minimum.
  • (C) both the pressure and velocity are minimum.
  • (D) both the pressure and velocity are maximum.
Correct Answer: (A) velocity is maximum and pressure is minimum.
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

This problem is based on fluid dynamics, specifically the Principle of Continuity and Bernoulli's Principle for an incompressible fluid in a horizontal pipe.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Equation of Continuity: \(A_1 v_1 = A_2 v_2 = constant\), where \(A\) is the cross-sectional area and \(v\) is the fluid velocity.

2. Bernoulli's Equation for horizontal flow: \(P + \frac{1}{2}\rho v^2 = constant\), where \(P\) is pressure, \(\rho\) is density, and \(v\) is velocity.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

According to the equation of continuity, the velocity of flow is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area (\(v \propto 1/A\)).

At the narrowest part of the pipe, the cross-sectional area is minimum, therefore the velocity of the fluid must be maximum.

Next, from Bernoulli's equation for horizontal flow (where gravitational potential energy is constant), the sum of static pressure and dynamic pressure is constant.

As the velocity \(v\) increases, the term \(\frac{1}{2}\rho v^2\) increases.

To keep the sum constant, the static pressure \(P\) must decrease.

Thus, at the narrowest part where velocity is maximum, the pressure is minimum.


Step 4: Final Answer:

At the narrowest part of the pipe, the velocity is maximum and the pressure is minimum.
Quick Tip: Remember: "Fast flow means low pressure". This is the Venturi effect. In any constriction, kinetic energy increases at the expense of pressure energy.


Question 2:

Two different coils have self - inductance \(L_1 = 9 mH\) and \(L_2 = 3 mH\). The current in first coil is increased at a constant rate. The current in the second coil is also increased at the same constant rate. At certain instant of time, the power given to the two coils is same. At that time, there was current and induced voltage in the two coils. At the same instant, the ratio of the energy stored in the first coil to that in second coil is

  • (A) 1 : 3
  • (B) 3 : 1
  • (C) 1 : 9
  • (D) 9 : 1
Correct Answer: (A) 1 : 3
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The power in an inductor is the rate at which energy is stored, given by \(P = V \cdot i\). The self-induced voltage is \(V = L \cdot \frac{di}{dt}\). The energy stored in an inductor is \(U = \frac{1}{2} L i^2\).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Power: \(P = \left(L \cdot \frac{di}{dt}\right) \cdot i\).

2. Energy: \(U = \frac{1}{2} L i^2\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the constant rate of change of current be \(k\). So, \(\frac{di_1}{dt} = \frac{di_2}{dt} = k\).

The power in the first coil is \(P_1 = L_1 \cdot i_1 \cdot \frac{di_1}{dt} = 9 \cdot i_1 \cdot k\).

The power in the second coil is \(P_2 = L_2 \cdot i_2 \cdot \frac{di_2}{dt} = 3 \cdot i_2 \cdot k\).

Since it is given that \(P_1 = P_2\) at a certain instant:
\[ 9 \cdot i_1 \cdot k = 3 \cdot i_2 \cdot k \implies 3i_1 = i_2 \implies \frac{i_1}{i_2} = \frac{1}{3} \]

Now, calculate the ratio of energy stored (\(U_1 / U_2\)):
\[ \frac{U_1}{U_2} = \frac{\frac{1}{2} L_1 i_1^2}{\frac{1}{2} L_2 i_2^2} = \frac{L_1}{L_2} \left( \frac{i_1}{i_2} \right)^2 \]

Substitute the known values:
\[ \frac{U_1}{U_2} = \frac{9}{3} \cdot \left( \frac{1}{3} \right)^2 = 3 \cdot \frac{1}{9} = \frac{1}{3} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio of energy stored is 1 : 3.
Quick Tip: When power is same and rates of change of current are same, the product \(L \cdot i\) must be constant (\(L_1 i_1 = L_2 i_2\)). This makes the energy ratio \(U \propto L \cdot (1/L)^2 = 1/L\). Thus \(U_1/U_2 = L_2/L_1 = 3/9 = 1/3\).


Question 3:

Four masses of \(1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg\) and \(4 kg\) are kept at co-ordinates \((0, 0)m, (0, 1)m\) and \((1, 0)m\) respectively. Using the co-ordinates of centre of mass its position vector is

  • (A) \(0.5\hat{i} + 0.7\hat{j}\)
  • (B) \(0.7\hat{i} + 0.5\hat{j}\)
  • (C) \(0.4\hat{i} + 0.6\hat{j}\)
  • (D) \(\hat{i} + \hat{j}\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(0.7\hat{i} + 0.5\hat{j}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The centre of mass of a system of particles is the point at which the entire mass of the system can be considered concentrated. Its position vector is the weighted average of the positions of the individual particles.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

The coordinates of the centre of mass \((X_{cm}, Y_{cm})\) are given by:
\[ X_{cm} = \frac{\sum m_i x_i}{\sum m_i}, \quad Y_{cm} = \frac{\sum m_i y_i}{\sum m_i} \]


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The problem text misses one coordinate due to a typo, but based on the 4 masses and the options, we can deduce the standard square configuration. The masses and their likely positions are:
\(m_1 = 1 kg\) at \((0, 0)m\)
\(m_2 = 2 kg\) at \((0, 1)m\)
\(m_3 = 3 kg\) at \((1, 1)m\) (assumed missing coordinate)
\(m_4 = 4 kg\) at \((1, 0)m\)

Total mass \(M = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 = 10 kg\).

Calculating \(X_{cm}\):
\[ X_{cm} = \frac{(1 \times 0) + (2 \times 0) + (3 \times 1) + (4 \times 1)}{10} = \frac{0 + 0 + 3 + 4}{10} = \frac{7}{10} = 0.7 m \]

Calculating \(Y_{cm}\):
\[ Y_{cm} = \frac{(1 \times 0) + (2 \times 1) + (3 \times 1) + (4 \times 0)}{10} = \frac{0 + 2 + 3 + 0}{10} = \frac{5}{10} = 0.5 m \]

The position vector is \(\vec{R}_{cm} = X_{cm}\hat{i} + Y_{cm}\hat{j}\).


Step 4: Final Answer:

The position vector of the centre of mass is \(0.7\hat{i} + 0.5\hat{j}\).
Quick Tip: To avoid mistakes, organize your data in a table with columns for mass, \(x\), \(y\), \(m \times x\), and \(m \times y\). Always check if the total mass is correct before dividing.


Question 4:

In between the plates of parallel plate capacitor of plate separation '\(d\)' a dielectric plate of thickness '\(t\)' is inserted. The capacitance becomes one-third of the original capacity without dielectric. The dielectric constant of the plate is

  • (A) \(\frac{t}{2d-t}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{t}{2d+t}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{3t}{d-t}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{3t}{d+t}\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\frac{t}{2d+t}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When a dielectric slab of thickness \(t\) and constant \(K\) is placed in a parallel plate capacitor of plate separation \(d\), the effective separation for vacuum reduces.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Original Capacitance: \(C_0 = \frac{\varepsilon_0 A}{d}\).

2. Capacitance with dielectric: \(C = \frac{\varepsilon_0 A}{(d - t) + \frac{t}{K}}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given that the new capacitance \(C\) is one-third of the original capacitance \(C_0\):
\[ C = \frac{1}{3} C_0 \]
\[ \frac{\varepsilon_0 A}{(d - t) + \frac{t}{K}} = \frac{1}{3} \cdot \frac{\varepsilon_0 A}{d} \]

Cancelling \(\varepsilon_0 A\) from both sides and taking reciprocals:
\[ (d - t) + \frac{t}{K} = 3d \]

Rearrange to solve for the term containing \(K\):
\[ \frac{t}{K} = 3d - d + t = 2d + t \]

Now, solve for the dielectric constant \(K\):
\[ K = \frac{t}{2d + t} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The dielectric constant of the plate is \(\frac{t}{2d+t}\).
Quick Tip: Remember the general formula for a capacitor partially filled with a dielectric: \(C = \frac{\varepsilon_0 A}{d - t(1 - 1/K)}\). It represents the plate separation being "reduced" by the presence of the dielectric.


Question 5:

A thin rod of length ' 4 L ' and mass ' 4 m ' is bent at the points as shown in the figure. The moment of inertia of the rod about an axis passing through point ' O ' and perpendicular to plane of the paper is

  • (A) \(\frac{mL^2}{3}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{10 mL^2}{3}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{mL^2}{12}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{mL^2}{24}\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\frac{10 mL^2}{3}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The moment of inertia of a system is the sum of the moments of inertia of its individual parts. For a complex shape, we use the standard formula for a rod and the parallel axis theorem.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Rod of mass \(m\), length \(L\) about an end: \(I = \frac{1}{3}mL^2\).

2. Parallel axis theorem: \(I = I_{cm} + md^2\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The rod of length \(4L\) and mass \(4m\) is divided into four equal segments (BA, AO, OC, CD) of length \(L\) and mass \(m\) each.

1. Segments AO and OC: Both are attached to the axis at O. Their MOI about O is:
\[ I_{AO} = \frac{1}{3}mL^2 \quad and \quad I_{OC} = \frac{1}{3}mL^2 \]

2. Segments BA and CD: Angle OAB and OCD are \(90^\circ\). To find the MOI of BA about O, use the parallel axis theorem. The COM of BA is at distance \(L/2\) from A. The distance \(d\) from O to the COM of BA is the hypotenuse of a right triangle with sides \(L\) and \(L/2\):
\[ d^2 = L^2 + \left(\frac{L}{2}\right)^2 = L^2 + \frac{L^2}{4} = \frac{5L^2}{4} \]

The MOI of BA about O is:
\[ I_{BA} = I_{cm} + md^2 = \frac{1}{12}mL^2 + m\left(\frac{5L^2}{4}\right) = \left(\frac{1}{12} + \frac{15}{12}\right)mL^2 = \frac{16}{12}mL^2 = \frac{4}{3}mL^2 \]

By symmetry, \(I_{CD} = \frac{4}{3}mL^2\).

3. Total MOI:
\[ I_{total} = I_{AO} + I_{OC} + I_{BA} + I_{CD} = \frac{1}{3}mL^2 + \frac{1}{3}mL^2 + \frac{4}{3}mL^2 + \frac{4}{3}mL^2 = \frac{10}{3}mL^2 \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The total moment of inertia is \(\frac{10 mL^2}{3}\).
Quick Tip: For such symmetric bent rods, first calculate the MOI of the central parts. Use symmetry to simplify calculations for the outer parts. Always verify the perpendicular distance from the pivot to the centre of mass.


Question 6:

The resistance of a coil for d.c. is \(5\Omega\). In a.c., the resistance will

  • (A) remain same.
  • (B) increase.
  • (C) decrease.
  • (D) be zero.
Correct Answer: (B) increase.
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The resistance offered by a conductor to Alternating Current (AC) is higher than that offered to Direct Current (DC) due to a phenomenon called the skin effect.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

The effective cross-sectional area decreases in AC due to the skin effect, leading to an increase in resistance: \(R_{ac} > R_{dc}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

In direct current (DC), the current density is uniform throughout the entire cross-section of the conductor.

In alternating current (AC), changing magnetic fields induce eddy currents within the conductor itself.

These eddy currents oppose the flow of the main current in the center of the wire and assist it near the surface.

This results in most of the current flowing in the "skin" (outer layer) of the conductor, reducing the effective cross-sectional area through which the current flows.

Since resistance is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area (\(R = \rho l / A\)), the effective resistance increases.
\[ R_{ac} > R_{dc} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

In AC, the resistance will increase.
Quick Tip: The skin effect becomes more pronounced at higher frequencies. This is why high-frequency transmission lines often use hollow conductors or multi-strand Litz wires.


Question 7:

When a ray of light is refracted from one medium to another, then the wavelength changes from \(6000 \AA\) to \(4000 \AA\). The critical angle for the interface will be

  • (A) \(\cos^{-1} \left( \frac{3}{2} \right)\)
  • (B) \(\sin^{-1} \left( \frac{2}{\sqrt{3}} \right)\)
  • (C) \(\sin^{-1} \left( \frac{2}{3} \right)\)
  • (D) \(\cos^{-1} \left( \frac{2}{\sqrt{3}} \right)\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\sin^{-1} \left( \frac{2}{3} \right)\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The refractive index of a medium is inversely proportional to the wavelength of light in that medium. The critical angle is the angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the angle of refraction in the rarer medium is \(90^\circ\).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Refractive index ratio: \(\frac{n_2}{n_1} = \frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}\).

2. Critical angle formula: \(\sin \theta_c = \frac{n_{rarer}}{n_{denser}}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let medium 1 have wavelength \(\lambda_1 = 6000 \AA\) and medium 2 have wavelength \(\lambda_2 = 4000 \AA\).

Since \(\lambda_2 < \lambda_1\), medium 2 has a higher refractive index (\(n_2 > n_1\)), making it the denser medium.

The critical angle \(\theta_c\) exists for light traveling from the denser to the rarer medium.
\[ \sin \theta_c = \frac{n_{rarer}}{n_{denser}} = \frac{n_1}{n_2} \]

From the wavelength relation, \(\frac{n_1}{n_2} = \frac{\lambda_2}{\lambda_1}\).

Substitute the values:
\[ \sin \theta_c = \frac{4000}{6000} = \frac{2}{3} \]

Therefore, the critical angle is:
\[ \theta_c = \sin^{-1} \left( \frac{2}{3} \right) \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The critical angle for the interface is \(\sin^{-1} \left( \frac{2}{3} \right)\).
Quick Tip: Always remember that \(\sin \theta_c\) must be less than or equal to 1. This means you should always divide the smaller wavelength by the larger wavelength when calculating the ratio for critical angle.


Question 8:

A pipe closed at one end vibrating in fifth overtone is in unison with open pipe vibrating in its fifth overtone. The ratio of \(l_c : l_o\) is [\(l_c = vibrating length of closed pipe, l_o = vibrating length of open pipe\)]

  • (A) 12 : 11
  • (B) 1 : 1
  • (C) 11 : 12
  • (D) 5 : 1
Correct Answer: (C) 11 : 12
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When two pipes are in unison, their frequencies of vibration are identical. We must equate the formula for the fifth overtone of a closed pipe to that of an open pipe.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Closed pipe frequency: \(f_n = (2n + 1) \frac{v}{4L}\) (where \(n\) is the overtone number, \(n=0, 1, 2...\)).

2. Open pipe frequency: \(f_n = (n + 1) \frac{v}{2L}\) (where \(n\) is the overtone number).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For the closed pipe in its fifth overtone (\(n=5\)):
\[ f_c = (2(5) + 1) \frac{v}{4l_c} = \frac{11v}{4l_c} \]

For the open pipe in its fifth overtone (\(n=5\)):
\[ f_o = (5 + 1) \frac{v}{2l_o} = \frac{6v}{2l_o} = \frac{3v}{l_o} \]

Since they are in unison, equate the frequencies (\(f_c = f_o\)):
\[ \frac{11v}{4l_c} = \frac{3v}{l_o} \]

Cancel \(v\) and cross-multiply to find the ratio \(l_c / l_o\):
\[ \frac{11}{4l_c} = \frac{3}{l_o} \implies \frac{l_c}{l_o} = \frac{11}{4 \times 3} = \frac{11}{12} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio of the lengths \(l_c : l_o\) is 11 : 12.
Quick Tip: Be careful with the terms "overtone" and "harmonic". For a closed pipe, only odd harmonics are present, so the \(n\)-th overtone is the \((2n+1)\)-th harmonic. For an open pipe, all harmonics are present, so the \(n\)-th overtone is the \((n+1)\)-th harmonic.


Question 9:

Two stars 'A' and 'B' radiate maximum energy at \(5200 \AA\) and \(6500 \AA\) respectively. Then the ratio of absolute temperatures of stars ' A ' and ' B ' is

  • (A) 25 : 16
  • (B) 5 : 4
  • (C) 4 : 5
  • (D) 16 : 25
Correct Answer: (B) 5 : 4
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Wien's Displacement Law, the wavelength \(\lambda_{max}\) corresponding to the maximum spectral emissive power of a blackbody is inversely proportional to its absolute temperature \(T\).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Wien's Law: \(\lambda_{max} \cdot T = b\) (Wien's constant).

Therefore, \(T \propto \frac{1}{\lambda_{max}}\), which gives \(\frac{T_A}{T_B} = \frac{\lambda_{max, B}}{\lambda_{max, A}}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given the peak wavelengths for the two stars:
\(\lambda_{max, A} = 5200 \AA\)
\(\lambda_{max, B} = 6500 \AA\)

Using the ratio derived from Wien's Law:
\[ \frac{T_A}{T_B} = \frac{6500}{5200} \]

Divide both the numerator and the denominator by 1300 to simplify the fraction:
\[ \frac{T_A}{T_B} = \frac{5}{4} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio of absolute temperatures of stars A and B is 5 : 4.
Quick Tip: Hotter stars appear bluer because their peak emission shifts to shorter wavelengths. Since star A has a shorter wavelength, it must be hotter. Therefore, the ratio \(T_A / T_B\) must be greater than 1.


Question 10:

A hollow charged metal sphere has a radius ' \(r\) '. If the potential difference between its surface and a point at a distance ' \(3r\) ' from the centre is ' \(v\) ', then the electric field intensity at a distance ' \(3r\) ' is

  • (A) \(\frac{V}{2r}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{v}{3r}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{v}{6r}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{v}{4r}\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\frac{v}{6r}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

For points on or outside a uniformly charged hollow metal sphere, it behaves as if all its charge \(Q\) is concentrated at its centre.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Electric Potential at distance \(x \ge r\): \(V_x = \frac{kQ}{x}\).

2. Electric Field at distance \(x \ge r\): \(E_x = \frac{kQ}{x^2}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The potential at the surface (\(x = r\)) is:
\[ V_s = \frac{kQ}{r} \]

The potential at a distance \(3r\) from the centre is:
\[ V_{3r} = \frac{kQ}{3r} \]

The given potential difference \(v\) between the surface and the point at \(3r\) is:
\[ v = V_s - V_{3r} = \frac{kQ}{r} - \frac{kQ}{3r} = kQ \left( \frac{3 - 1}{3r} \right) = \frac{2kQ}{3r} \]

From this, we can express the constant \(kQ\) in terms of \(v\) and \(r\):
\[ kQ = \frac{3rv}{2} \]

The electric field intensity at distance \(3r\) is:
\[ E_{3r} = \frac{kQ}{(3r)^2} = \frac{kQ}{9r^2} \]

Substitute the expression for \(kQ\) into the electric field equation:
\[ E_{3r} = \frac{1}{9r^2} \left( \frac{3rv}{2} \right) = \frac{3v}{18r} = \frac{v}{6r} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The electric field intensity at distance \(3r\) is \(\frac{v}{6r}\).
Quick Tip: For an external point at distance \(x\), the electric field \(E = V_{point}/x\). Here, \(V_{point}\) is the potential exactly at \(3r\), which is \(kQ/3r\). By finding \(V_{point}\) from the potential difference, you can quickly find \(E\).


Question 11:

For a given medium, the speed of light and the polarising angle are ' \(v\) ' and ' \(i_p\) ' respectively, then (\(c\) = speed of light in vacuum)

  • (A) \(v \sin(i_p) = c \cos(i_p)\)
  • (B) \(c = v \cot(i_p)\)
  • (C) \(v \cos(i_p) = c \sin(i_p)\)
  • (D) \(v = c \cos(i_p)\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(v \sin(i_p) = c \cos(i_p)\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Brewster's Law relates the polarising angle (or Brewster's angle) of a medium to its refractive index. The refractive index is defined as the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to the speed in the medium.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Brewster's Law: \(\mu = \tan(i_p)\).

2. Refractive index definition: \(\mu = \frac{c}{v}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Equating the two expressions for the refractive index \(\mu\):
\[ \frac{c}{v} = \tan(i_p) \]

Express \(\tan(i_p)\) in terms of sine and cosine:
\[ \frac{c}{v} = \frac{\sin(i_p)}{\cos(i_p)} \]

Cross-multiply to rearrange the equation into a linear form:
\[ c \cos(i_p) = v \sin(i_p) \]

This exactly matches the format in Option A.


Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct relation is \(v \sin(i_p) = c \cos(i_p)\).
Quick Tip: At the polarising angle \(i_p\), the reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other. This geometric condition directly leads to the relation \(\tan(i_p) = \mu\).


Question 12:

A particle of mass ' \(m\) ' is executing S.H.M. about the origin on \(x\)-axis with frequency \(\sqrt{\frac{ka}{\pi m}}\), where ' \(k\) ' is a constant and ' \(a\) ' is the amplitude of S.H.M. If ' \(x\) ' is a displacement of a particle, at time ' \(t\) ', potential energy of the particle will be

  • (A) \(\frac{1}{2} kax^2\)
  • (B) \(\pi kax^2\)
  • (C) \(2\pi kax^2\)
  • (D) \(2 kax^2\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(2\pi kax^2\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM), the potential energy of the particle depends on its displacement \(x\) from the mean position and its angular frequency \(\omega\).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Angular frequency: \(\omega = 2\pi f\).

2. Potential Energy: \(U = \frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 x^2\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The given frequency of SHM is:
\[ f = \sqrt{\frac{ka}{\pi m}} \]

First, find the angular frequency \(\omega\):
\[ \omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi \sqrt{\frac{ka}{\pi m}} \]

Square the angular frequency:
\[ \omega^2 = 4\pi^2 \left(\frac{ka}{\pi m}\right) = \frac{4\pi k a}{m} \]

Now, substitute \(\omega^2\) into the potential energy formula:
\[ U = \frac{1}{2} m \omega^2 x^2 = \frac{1}{2} m \left( \frac{4\pi k a}{m} \right) x^2 \]

Cancel the mass \(m\) and simplify the constants:
\[ U = \frac{1}{2} (4\pi k a) x^2 = 2\pi k a x^2 \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The potential energy of the particle is \(2\pi kax^2\).
Quick Tip: Always distinguish between linear frequency \(f\) (in Hz) and angular frequency \(\omega\) (in rad/s). The factor of \(2\pi\) is crucial and squaring it introduces the \(4\pi^2\) which cancels nicely in this problem.


Question 13:

A satellite is revolving round the earth with orbital speed ' \(V_0\) '. If it stops suddenly, the speed with which it will strike the surface of the earth would be ( \(V_e\) = escape velocity of a particle on earth's surface)

  • (A) \(\frac{V_e^2}{V_0}\)
  • (B) \(2 V_0\)
  • (C) \(\sqrt{V_e^2 - V_0^2}\)
  • (D) \(\sqrt{V_e^2 - 2 V_0^2}\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(\sqrt{V_e^2 - 2 V_0^2}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When the satellite stops, its kinetic energy drops to zero, but it still possesses gravitational potential energy at its orbital radius \(r\). As it falls to Earth, this potential energy is converted into kinetic energy according to the Conservation of Mechanical Energy.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Orbital velocity at radius \(r\): \(V_0^2 = \frac{GM}{r}\).

2. Escape velocity from surface \(R\): \(V_e^2 = \frac{2GM}{R}\).

3. Conservation of Energy: \(KE_i + PE_i = KE_f + PE_f\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let \(R\) be the radius of Earth and \(r\) be the orbital radius.

Initial state (satellite stops at distance \(r\)):
\[ KE_i = 0, \quad PE_i = -\frac{GMm}{r} \implies E_i = -\frac{GMm}{r} \]

Final state (satellite strikes the surface at distance \(R\)):
\[ KE_f = \frac{1}{2}mv^2, \quad PE_f = -\frac{GMm}{R} \implies E_f = \frac{1}{2}mv^2 - \frac{GMm}{R} \]

Applying energy conservation (\(E_i = E_f\)):
\[ -\frac{GMm}{r} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2 - \frac{GMm}{R} \]

Divide by \(m\) and rearrange to solve for \(v^2\):
\[ \frac{1}{2}v^2 = \frac{GM}{R} - \frac{GM}{r} \]

From the standard formulas, we substitute \(\frac{GM}{R} = \frac{V_e^2}{2}\) and \(\frac{GM}{r} = V_0^2\):
\[ \frac{1}{2}v^2 = \frac{V_e^2}{2} - V_0^2 \]

Multiply the entire equation by 2:
\[ v^2 = V_e^2 - 2V_0^2 \implies v = \sqrt{V_e^2 - 2V_0^2} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The speed with which it will strike the Earth is \(\sqrt{V_e^2 - 2 V_0^2}\).
Quick Tip: Remember the relation between potential energy change and orbital parameters. The change in gravitational potential \(\Delta V = GM/R - GM/r\). Since \(GM/R = V_e^2/2\) and \(GM/r = V_0^2\), the kinetic energy gained is simply \(\frac{1}{2}mv^2 = m(\frac{V_e^2}{2} - V_0^2)\).


Question 14:

The angular momentum of electron in hydrogen atom in first orbit is ' \(L\) '. The change in angular momentum if electron is in second orbit of hydrogen atom is

  • (A) \(2 L\)
  • (B) \(L\)
  • (C) \(\frac{L}{2}\)
  • (D) \(4 L\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(L\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Bohr's postulates for the hydrogen atom, the orbital angular momentum of an electron is quantized and must be an integral multiple of \(\frac{h}{2\pi}\).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Angular momentum in the \(n\)-th orbit: \(L_n = n \frac{h}{2\pi}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For the first orbit (\(n = 1\)), the angular momentum is given as \(L\):
\[ L_1 = 1 \cdot \frac{h}{2\pi} = L \]

This means that the fundamental unit of angular momentum \(\frac{h}{2\pi}\) is equal to \(L\).

For the second orbit (\(n = 2\)), the angular momentum is:
\[ L_2 = 2 \cdot \frac{h}{2\pi} = 2L \]

The change in angular momentum when the electron moves from the first to the second orbit is:
\[ \Delta L = L_2 - L_1 = 2L - L = L \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The change in angular momentum is \(L\).
Quick Tip: Since angular momentum is linearly proportional to the principal quantum number \(n\), the difference in angular momentum between any two adjacent orbits \((n)\) and \((n+1)\) is always exactly \(1 \times \frac{h}{2\pi} = L\).


Question 15:

Four point masses, each of mass ' \(m\) ' are arranged in \(X - Y\) plane as shown in the figure. The moment of inertia of this system about \(X\)-axis is


  • (A) \(3 m a^2\)
  • (B) \(5 m a^2\)
  • (C) \(4 m a^2\)
  • (D) \(6 m a^2\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(5 m a^2\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The moment of inertia of a system of discrete point masses about a specific axis is the sum of the products of each mass and the square of its perpendicular distance from that axis.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:
\(I_x = \sum m_i y_i^2\), where \(y_i\) is the perpendicular distance (y-coordinate) of the \(i\)-th mass from the X-axis.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Identify the coordinates of the four masses from the provided figure:

1. Mass 1 at origin: \((0, 0)\). Its perpendicular distance from X-axis, \(y_1 = 0\).

2. Mass 2 on X-axis: \((3a, 0)\). Its perpendicular distance from X-axis, \(y_2 = 0\).

3. Mass 3 on Y-axis: \((0, a)\). Its perpendicular distance from X-axis, \(y_3 = a\).

4. Mass 4 in quadrant IV: \((a, -2a)\). Its perpendicular distance from X-axis, \(y_4 = |-2a| = 2a\).

Now, calculate the total Moment of Inertia about the X-axis:
\[ I_x = m(y_1^2 + y_2^2 + y_3^2 + y_4^2) \]
\[ I_x = m(0^2 + 0^2 + a^2 + (-2a)^2) \]
\[ I_x = m(0 + 0 + a^2 + 4a^2) = m(5a^2) = 5 m a^2 \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The moment of inertia of the system about the X-axis is \(5 m a^2\).
Quick Tip: When calculating moment of inertia about an axis, masses lying exactly ON that axis do not contribute to the result because their perpendicular distance to the axis is zero.


Question 16:

In biprism experiment the maximum intensity is ' \(I_0\) '. If the path difference between the two interfering waves is ' \(\lambda/4\) ' then intensity at the point on the screen is \(\left[ \sin 45^\circ = \cos 45^\circ = \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \right]\)

  • (A) \(\frac{I_0}{4}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{I_0}{3}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{I_0}{2}\)
  • (D) \(I_0\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\frac{I_0}{2}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In an interference pattern, the resultant intensity at any point depends on the phase difference between the two interfering waves. Maximum intensity occurs when waves are perfectly in phase.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Phase difference (\(\phi\)): \(\phi = \frac{2\pi}{\lambda} \cdot \Delta x\), where \(\Delta x\) is the path difference.

2. Intensity (\(I\)): \(I = I_0 \cos^2 \left( \frac{\phi}{2} \right)\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given the path difference \(\Delta x = \lambda / 4\).

First, calculate the phase difference \(\phi\):
\[ \phi = \frac{2\pi}{\lambda} \cdot \left(\frac{\lambda}{4}\right) = \frac{\pi}{2} \]

Now, use the intensity formula:
\[ I = I_0 \cos^2 \left( \frac{\phi}{2} \right) = I_0 \cos^2 \left( \frac{\pi/2}{2} \right) = I_0 \cos^2 \left( \frac{\pi}{4} \right) \]

Since we know \(\cos \left(\frac{\pi}{4}\right) = \cos(45^\circ) = \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\):
\[ I = I_0 \left( \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \right)^2 = I_0 \cdot \frac{1}{2} = \frac{I_0}{2} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The intensity at the point on the screen is \(\frac{I_0}{2}\).
Quick Tip: A path difference of \(\lambda/4\) corresponds to a phase difference of \(90^\circ\). Because the intensity formula uses half the phase angle (\(45^\circ\)), the resulting intensity will always be exactly half of the maximum intensity.


Question 17:

Work done to get ' \(n\) ' spherical drops of equal size from a single spherical drop of water, is proportional to

  • (A) \(\left( \frac{1}{n^{2/3}} - 1 \right)\)
  • (B) \(\left( \frac{1}{n^{1/3}} - 1 \right)\)
  • (C) \(n^{1/3} - 1\)
  • (D) \(n^{4/3} - 1\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(n^{1/3} - 1\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When a large drop is broken into many smaller drops, the total surface area of the system increases. Work must be done against surface tension to create this new surface area.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Conservation of Volume: \(V_{initial} = n \cdot V_{final}\).

2. Work done: \(W = T \cdot \Delta A\), where \(T\) is surface tension and \(\Delta A\) is the change in total surface area.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the large drop have radius \(R\) and each small drop have radius \(r\).

Equating volumes:
\[ \frac{4}{3}\pi R^3 = n \cdot \frac{4}{3}\pi r^3 \implies R^3 = n r^3 \implies r = \frac{R}{n^{1/3}} \]

Calculate the initial surface area:
\[ A_i = 4\pi R^2 \]

Calculate the total final surface area of the \(n\) drops:
\[ A_f = n \cdot 4\pi r^2 = n \cdot 4\pi \left( \frac{R}{n^{1/3}} \right)^2 = n \cdot 4\pi \frac{R^2}{n^{2/3}} = 4\pi R^2 n^{1/3} \]

Calculate the work done (change in surface area multiplied by surface tension):
\[ W = T(A_f - A_i) = T(4\pi R^2 n^{1/3} - 4\pi R^2) = 4\pi R^2 T (n^{1/3} - 1) \]

Since \(4\pi R^2 T\) is constant for a given initial drop, the work done \(W\) is proportional to \((n^{1/3} - 1)\).


Step 4: Final Answer:

The work done is proportional to \(n^{1/3} - 1\).
Quick Tip: In droplet problems, radius \(r\) scales as \(n^{-1/3}\) and area scales as \(r^2\), so individual drop area scales as \(n^{-2/3}\). Multiplying by \(n\) drops gives total area scaling as \(n \times n^{-2/3} = n^{1/3}\).


Question 18:

Diode and resistance are connected as shown in figure. Out of the following statements which one is TRUE?

  • (A) Diode \(D_1\) and diode \(D_2\) both are forward biased.
  • (B) Diode \(D_1\). and diode \(D_2\) both are reverse biased.
  • (C) Diode \(D_1\) is forward biased and diode \(D_2\) is reverse biased.
  • (D) Diode \(D_1\) is reverse biased and diode \(D_2\) is forward biased.
Correct Answer: (C) Diode \(D_1\) is forward biased and diode \(D_2\) is reverse biased.
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A p-n junction diode acts like a one-way valve. It is forward biased (conducts) if the potential at its p-side is higher than the potential at its n-side (\(V_p > V_n\)). It is reverse biased if the p-side potential is lower than the n-side potential (\(V_p < V_n\)).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Evaluate the condition for each diode:

- Forward Biased: \(V_{anode} > V_{cathode}\)

- Reverse Biased: \(V_{anode} \le V_{cathode}\)


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Analyze Fig. (1) for diode \(D_1\):

The p-side (triangle side) is connected to \(0 V\).

The n-side (line side) is connected to \(-4 V\) via a resistor \(R_1\).

Since \(0 V > -4 V\), the p-side is at a higher potential. Therefore, \(D_1\) is forward biased.



Analyze Fig. (2) for diode \(D_2\):

The p-side is connected to \(-5 V\).

The n-side is connected to \(-3 V\) via a resistor \(R_2\).

Since \(-5 V < -3 V\), the p-side is at a lower potential. Therefore, \(D_2\) is reverse biased.


Step 4: Final Answer:

Diode \(D_1\) is forward biased and diode \(D_2\) is reverse biased.
Quick Tip: When dealing with negative voltages, remember that the number closer to zero is algebraically "higher". For example, \(-3 V\) is a higher potential than \(-5 V\).


Question 19:

Two uniform strings ' A ' and ' B ' made of steel are made to vibrate under same tension. If the first overtone of ' A ' is equal to second overtone of ' B ' and radius of ' A ' is twice that of ' B '. Then the ratio of length of string ' A ' to that of ' B ' is

  • (A) 2 : 1
  • (B) 3 : 4
  • (C) 3 : 2
  • (D) 1 : 3
Correct Answer: (D) 1 : 3
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The frequency of a vibrating string is dependent on its length, the tension applied, and its mass per unit length. The mass per unit length (\(\mu\)) for a cylindrical wire is \(\mu = \pi r^2 \rho\), where \(r\) is radius and \(\rho\) is density.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Frequency of \(p\)-th harmonic: \(f_p = \frac{p}{2L} \sqrt{\frac{T}{\mu}} = \frac{p}{2Lr} \sqrt{\frac{T}{\pi \rho}}\).

2. Harmonics and Overtones: The 1st overtone is the 2nd harmonic (\(p=2\)), and the 2nd overtone is the 3rd harmonic (\(p=3\)).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the subscripts \(A\) and \(B\) refer to the two strings.

We are given: \(T_A = T_B\) (same tension), \(\rho_A = \rho_B\) (both steel), and \(r_A = 2r_B\).

Condition given: First overtone of A = Second overtone of B.
\[ f_{2,A} = f_{3,B} \]
\[ \frac{2}{2L_A r_A} \sqrt{\frac{T}{\pi \rho}} = \frac{3}{2L_B r_B} \sqrt{\frac{T}{\pi \rho}} \]

Cancel the common terms \(\sqrt{\frac{T}{\pi \rho}}\) and the 2s in the denominators:
\[ \frac{2}{L_A r_A} = \frac{3}{L_B r_B} \]

Substitute \(r_A = 2r_B\) into the equation:
\[ \frac{2}{L_A (2r_B)} = \frac{3}{L_B r_B} \]

Simplify by cancelling \(2\) and \(r_B\):
\[ \frac{1}{L_A} = \frac{3}{L_B} \]

Rearrange to find the ratio \(L_A / L_B\):
\[ \frac{L_A}{L_B} = \frac{1}{3} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio of length of string A to that of B is 1 : 3.
Quick Tip: For strings of the same material and tension, frequency is simply inversely proportional to both length and radius: \(f \propto \frac{p}{L \cdot r}\). Equating these directly saves time.


Question 20:

Which one of the following is the correct equation for the electric circuit shown in the figure?

  • (A) \(E_1 - (i_1 + i_2)R + i_1 r_1 = 0\)
  • (B) \(E_1 - (i_1 + i_2)R - i_1 r_1 = 0\)
  • (C) \(E_2 - i_2 r_2 - E_1 - i_1 r_1 = 0\)
  • (D) \(E_2 - (i_1 + i_2)R + i_2 r_2 = 0\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(E_1 - (i_1 + i_2)R - i_1 r_1 = 0\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Kirchhoff's Voltage Law (KVL) states that the algebraic sum of all potential differences in any closed loop of a circuit is zero (\(\sum \Delta V = 0\)). We assign signs based on the direction of loop traversal relative to current flow and battery terminals.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Resistor potential drop: \(-IR\) (if moving with current), \(+IR\) (if against).

2. Battery potential: \(+E\) (moving from - to +), \(-E\) (moving from + to -).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Observe the circuit diagram. The current \(i_1\) flows from the cell \(E_1\) and \(i_2\) flows from the cell \(E_2\). At the left junction, they merge to form current \(i_1 + i_2\) flowing through the top resistor \(R\).

Let's apply KVL to the upper closed loop containing \(E_1\), \(r_1\), and \(R\).

Start at the left node and move clockwise around the top loop:

1. Moving right through the top resistor \(R\), we go in the direction of current \((i_1 + i_2)\), so potential drops: \(-(i_1 + i_2)R\).

2. Moving left through the middle branch, we pass through internal resistance \(r_1\) in the direction of current \(i_1\), so potential drops: \(-i_1 r_1\).

3. We then pass through the cell \(E_1\) from the negative to the positive terminal, so potential rises: \(+E_1\).

Setting the sum to zero:
\[ -(i_1 + i_2)R - i_1 r_1 + E_1 = 0 \]

Rearranging to match the options:
\[ E_1 - (i_1 + i_2)R - i_1 r_1 = 0 \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct equation is \(E_1 - (i_1 + i_2)R - i_1 r_1 = 0\).
Quick Tip: Always trace the loop path carefully. If the option equations start with \(E_1\) or \(E_2\) positively, it means the loop was traced in the direction that goes from the negative to positive terminal of that respective cell.


Question 21:

A pendulum is performing simple harmonic motion. The acceleration of the bob is \(20 cm s^{-2}\) at a distance of \(5 cm\) from mean position. The time period of oscillation is

  • (A) \(2 s\)
  • (B) \(\pi s\)
  • (C) \(2\pi s\)
  • (D) \(1 s\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\pi\text{ s}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In Simple Harmonic Motion, the magnitude of acceleration is directly proportional to the displacement from the mean position. The constant of proportionality is the square of the angular frequency (\(\omega^2\)).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Acceleration magnitude: \(a = \omega^2 x\).

2. Time period: \(T = \frac{2\pi}{\omega}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given values:

Acceleration \(a = 20 cm/s^2\)

Displacement \(x = 5 cm\)

Use the acceleration formula to find \(\omega^2\):
\[ 20 = \omega^2 \cdot 5 \]
\[ \omega^2 = \frac{20}{5} = 4 \]
\[ \omega = 2 rad/s \]

Now, calculate the time period \(T\):
\[ T = \frac{2\pi}{\omega} = \frac{2\pi}{2} = \pi seconds \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The time period of oscillation is \(\pi s\).
Quick Tip: Notice that units are consistent (cm/s\(^2\) and cm), so you don't need to convert to standard SI units (meters). The conversion factors would cancel out anyway.


Question 22:

A spherical body of radius ' \(r\) ' radiates power ' \(P\) ' at \(T\) kelvin. If the radius is halved and the temperature doubled the power radiated in the same time ' \(t\) ' will be

  • (A) \(\frac{P}{2}\)
  • (B) \(2 P\)
  • (C) \(4 P\)
  • (D) \(8 P\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(4 P\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Stefan-Boltzmann law relates the power radiated by a black body to its surface area and its absolute temperature.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Radiated power: \(P = \sigma A T^4 = \sigma (4\pi r^2) T^4\), where \(\sigma\) is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant, \(A\) is the surface area, and \(T\) is the absolute temperature.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The initial power radiated is:
\[ P = \sigma (4\pi r^2) T^4 \]

The new radius is \(r' = r/2\) and the new temperature is \(T' = 2T\).

Calculate the new power \(P'\):
\[ P' = \sigma (4\pi r'^2) T'^4 \]

Substitute the new values:
\[ P' = \sigma \left( 4\pi \left(\frac{r}{2}\right)^2 \right) (2T)^4 \]
\[ P' = \sigma \left( 4\pi \frac{r^2}{4} \right) (16T^4) \]

Group the constants back to identify \(P\):
\[ P' = 16 \cdot \frac{1}{4} \cdot \left[ \sigma (4\pi r^2) T^4 \right] \]
\[ P' = 4 \cdot P \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The new power radiated will be \(4 P\).
Quick Tip: Because area scales as \(r^2\) and radiation scales as \(T^4\), halving the radius introduces a factor of \((1/2)^2 = 1/4\), and doubling the temperature introduces a factor of \(2^4 = 16\). The combined factor is \(16/4 = 4\).


Question 23:

For a common emitter transistor configuration the ratio of \(\frac{I_C}{I_E} = 0.96\), then the current gain in this configuration is

  • (A) 6
  • (B) 12
  • (C) 24
  • (D) 48
Correct Answer: (C) 24
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In transistors, current parameters are related. The ratio of collector current (\(I_C\)) to emitter current (\(I_E\)) is denoted by \(\alpha\). The current gain in a common-emitter (CE) configuration is denoted by \(\beta\), which is the ratio of collector current to base current (\(I_B\)).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Definition of alpha: \(\alpha = \frac{I_C}{I_E}\).

2. Transistor current equation: \(I_E = I_B + I_C\).

3. Relation between \(\alpha\) and \(\beta\): \(\beta = \frac{\alpha}{1 - \alpha}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

We are given \(\frac{I_C}{I_E} = 0.96\), which means \(\alpha = 0.96\).

Using the relation between \(\beta\) and \(\alpha\):
\[ \beta = \frac{\alpha}{1 - \alpha} \]

Substitute the value of \(\alpha\):
\[ \beta = \frac{0.96}{1 - 0.96} \]
\[ \beta = \frac{0.96}{0.04} \]

Perform the division:
\[ \beta = 24 \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The current gain in this configuration is 24.
Quick Tip: To remember the relation easily: \(\beta\) is always a large number (typically 20-200), while \(\alpha\) is always slightly less than 1 (0.95-0.99). Dividing by a small number \((1-\alpha)\) gives you the large \(\beta\).


Question 24:

A stone is thrown upward with a speed 'u' from the top of a tower reaches the ground with velocity ' \(3u\) '. The height of the tower is ( \(g\) = acceleration due to gravity)

  • (A) \(\frac{3u^2}{g}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{4u^2}{g}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{6u^2}{g}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{9u^2}{g}\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\frac{4u^2}{g}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

This is a problem of one-dimensional kinematics under uniform gravity. The motion can be entirely described by the equations of motion. Using the third equation of motion avoids the need to find the time of flight.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Kinematic equation: \(v^2 = u^2 + 2as\).

Taking upward as positive and downward as negative:

Initial velocity \(v_i = +u\).

Acceleration \(a = -g\).

Final velocity \(v_f = -3u\) (since it is directed downwards).

Displacement \(s = -h\) (where \(h\) is the height of the tower).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Substitute the values into the kinematic equation:
\[ (-3u)^2 = (+u)^2 + 2(-g)(-h) \]
\[ 9u^2 = u^2 + 2gh \]

Subtract \(u^2\) from both sides:
\[ 8u^2 = 2gh \]

Divide by \(2g\) to solve for height \(h\):
\[ h = \frac{8u^2}{2g} = \frac{4u^2}{g} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The height of the tower is \(\frac{4u^2}{g}\).
Quick Tip: Because velocity is squared in \(v^2 = u^2 + 2as\), it doesn't matter if you take upward or downward as positive, as long as you are consistent. The kinetic energy relation \(\frac{1}{2}mv^2 - \frac{1}{2}mu^2 = mgh\) achieves the exact same result efficiently.


Question 25:

A metal surface is illuminated by light of two different wavelengths \(207 nm\) and \(414 nm\) . The maximum speeds of photoelectrons corresponding to these wavelengths are \(u_1\) and \(u_2\) respectively with \(u_1 : u_2 = 2 : 1\). The work function of the metal is (\(hc = 1242 eV nm\))

  • (A) \(1.6 eV\)
  • (B) \(2.0 eV\)
  • (C) \(2.4 eV\)
  • (D) \(3.0 eV\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(2.0\text{ eV}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Einstein's photoelectric equation, the maximum kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons is the difference between the energy of the incident photon and the work function of the metal.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Photon Energy: \(E = \frac{hc}{\lambda}\).

2. Photoelectric Equation: \(K_{max} = E - W\), where \(W\) is the work function.

3. Kinetic Energy: \(K = \frac{1}{2} m u^2\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Calculate the photon energies:
\[ E_1 = \frac{1242}{207} = 6 eV \]
\[ E_2 = \frac{1242}{414} = 3 eV \]

Given the ratio of maximum speeds \(u_1 = 2u_2\), the ratio of maximum kinetic energies is:
\[ K_1 = \frac{1}{2} m u_1^2 = \frac{1}{2} m (2u_2)^2 = 4 \left( \frac{1}{2} m u_2^2 \right) = 4K_2 \]

Substitute the kinetic energies into the photoelectric equations:
\[ K_1 = E_1 - W \implies 4K_2 = 6 - W \quad --- (Eq. 1) \]
\[ K_2 = E_2 - W \implies K_2 = 3 - W \quad --- (Eq. 2) \]

Substitute \(K_2\) from Eq. 2 into Eq. 1:
\[ 4(3 - W) = 6 - W \]
\[ 12 - 4W = 6 - W \]
\[ 12 - 6 = 4W - W \]
\[ 6 = 3W \implies W = 2 eV \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The work function of the metal is \(2.0 eV\).
Quick Tip: If speeds are in a \(2:1\) ratio, kinetic energies are in a \(4:1\) ratio. Set up the equations directly as \(E_1 - W = 4(E_2 - W)\) to quickly isolate and solve for \(W\).


Question 26:

In thermodynamic process, which of the following statements is not true?

  • (A) In an adiabatic process, the system is insulated from the surroundings.
  • (B) In an isochoric process, the pressure remains constant.
  • (C) In an isothermal process, the temperature remains constant.
  • (D) In an adiabatic process, \(pv^\gamma = constant\).
Correct Answer: (B) In an isochoric process, the pressure remains constant.
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Thermodynamic processes are characterized by the physical quantities that remain constant during the change of state.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Review the definitions of thermodynamic processes.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's evaluate each statement:

(A) In an adiabatic process, there is no heat exchange with the surroundings (\(\Delta Q = 0\)). This is achieved by insulating the system. This statement is True.

(B) In an isochoric process, the volume remains constant (\(\Delta V = 0\)), not the pressure. A process where pressure remains constant is called isobaric. Therefore, this statement is False.

(C) In an isothermal process, the temperature remains constant (\(\Delta T = 0\)). This statement is True.

(D) For an ideal gas undergoing a reversible adiabatic process, the relation between pressure and volume is given by \(PV^\gamma = constant\). This statement is True.


Step 4: Final Answer:

The statement "In an isochoric process, the pressure remains constant" is not true.
Quick Tip: Prefix mnemonics: "Iso" means equal/constant. "Choric" relates to volume (space). "Baric" relates to pressure (barometer). "Thermal" relates to temperature.


Question 27:

A charged particle is subjected to acceleration in a cyclotron which consists of two dees '\(D_1\)' and '\(D_2\)'. The charged particle undergoes increase in its speed.

  • (A) inside \(D_1, D_2\) and the gap between dees.
  • (B) only inside \(D_1\).
  • (C) only in the gap between \(D_1\) and \(D_2\).
  • (D) only inside \(D_2\).
Correct Answer: (C) only in the gap between \(D_1\) and \(D_2\).
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A cyclotron accelerates charged particles using a combination of a constant magnetic field and a rapidly alternating electric field.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Inside the hollow metal dees, the electric field is zero due to electrostatic shielding.

2. The magnetic field provides the centripetal force to bend the path into a semicircle but cannot change the speed of the particle (magnetic force is always perpendicular to velocity).

3. The alternating electric field exists only in the gap between the dees.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Because the interior of the dees is a hollow conductor, there is no electric field inside them. The charged particle moves inside the dees at a constant speed along a circular path under the influence of the magnetic field.

When the particle enters the gap between the two dees, it is acted upon by the electric field created by the high-frequency oscillator.

This electric field does work on the particle, thereby increasing its kinetic energy and speed.

Therefore, the acceleration (increase in speed) occurs exclusively in the gap between the dees.


Step 4: Final Answer:

The charged particle undergoes an increase in its speed only in the gap between \(D_1\) and \(D_2\).
Quick Tip: Magnetic fields can only change the direction of a moving charge, never its speed. Only electric fields can change the speed (kinetic energy) of a charge.


Question 28:

In case of well of death which is a vertical cylindrical wall of radius ' \(r\) ' inside which vehicle is driven in horizontal circles. If ' \(m\) ' is mass of vehicle, ' \(V\) ' is the velocity and ' \(\mu_s\) ' is the coefficient of static friction between the wheels of vehicle and walls then correct relation is [ \(g\) = acceleration due to gravity]

  • (A) \(V^2 \le \frac{rg}{\mu_s}\)
  • (B) \(V \le \frac{rg}{\mu_s}\)
  • (C) \(V^2 \ge \frac{rg}{\mu_s}\)
  • (D) \(V \ge \frac{rg}{\mu_s}\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(V^2 \ge \frac{rg}{\mu_s}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

For a vehicle to drive in a horizontal circle on the vertical wall of a "well of death", the downward gravitational force must be balanced by the upward force of static friction.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Centripetal force provided by Normal reaction: \(N = \frac{mV^2}{r}\).

2. Frictional force opposing weight: \(f = mg\).

3. Condition for no slipping: \(f \le \mu_s N\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

To keep the vehicle from falling, the required friction force is equal to the vehicle's weight:
\[ f = mg \]

The normal force exerted by the wall pushes the vehicle towards the center of the circle, providing the necessary centripetal force:
\[ N = \frac{mV^2}{r} \]

The maximum available static friction force is \(f_{max} = \mu_s N\).

To prevent falling, the required friction must be less than or equal to the maximum available friction:
\[ f \le \mu_s N \]

Substitute the expressions for \(f\) and \(N\):
\[ mg \le \mu_s \left( \frac{mV^2}{r} \right) \]

Cancel the mass \(m\) from both sides:
\[ g \le \frac{\mu_s V^2}{r} \]

Rearrange to solve for \(V^2\):
\[ V^2 \ge \frac{rg}{\mu_s} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The correct relation is \(V^2 \ge \frac{rg}{\mu_s}\).
Quick Tip: In a "well of death", you must drive fast enough to generate enough normal force to support your weight via friction. Thus, there is a minimum velocity limit, not a maximum one.


Question 29:

In an oscillating LC circuit, the maximum charge on the capacitor is ' \(Q\) '. When the energy is stored equally between the electric and magnetic fields, the instantaneous charge on the capacitor ' \(q\) ' is

  • (A) \(Q\)
  • (B) \(\frac{Q}{2}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{Q}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{Q}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\frac{Q}{\sqrt{2}}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In an LC circuit, energy continuously oscillates between the electric field of the capacitor and the magnetic field of the inductor. The total energy is constant.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Total Energy: \(E_{total} = \frac{Q^2}{2C}\), where \(Q\) is max charge.

2. Instantaneous Electric Energy: \(U_E = \frac{q^2}{2C}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

When energy is shared equally between the electric and magnetic fields, the electric energy \(U_E\) is exactly half of the total energy \(E_{total}\).
\[ U_E = \frac{1}{2} E_{total} \]

Substitute the formulas for the energies:
\[ \frac{q^2}{2C} = \frac{1}{2} \left( \frac{Q^2}{2C} \right) \]

Cancel the common denominator \(2C\):
\[ q^2 = \frac{Q^2}{2} \]

Take the square root of both sides to find \(q\):
\[ q = \frac{Q}{\sqrt{2}} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The instantaneous charge on the capacitor is \(\frac{Q}{\sqrt{2}}\).
Quick Tip: Energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude (\(q^2\) or \(i^2\)). If energy is halved, the amplitude becomes \(1/\sqrt{2}\) of its maximum value. This parallels finding RMS values in AC circuits.


Question 30:

Two particles execute S.H.M. of same amplitude and frequency along the same straight line path. They pass each other when going in opposite directions, each time their displacement is half the amplitude. The phase difference between them is \((\sin 30^\circ = 0 \cdot 5)\)

  • (A) \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{5\pi}{6}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{2\pi}{3}\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(\frac{2\pi}{3}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Two particles in SHM with identical properties passing each other means they have the same displacement at that instant but opposite velocities. The phase angle determines both displacement and direction of velocity.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Displacement equation: \(x = A \sin(\omega t + \phi)\).

2. Velocity equation: \(v = A\omega \cos(\omega t + \phi)\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the displacement be \(x = A/2\).

The phase angle \(\theta = (\omega t + \phi)\) for this displacement satisfies:
\[ \frac{A}{2} = A \sin(\theta) \implies \sin(\theta) = 0.5 \]

The possible phase angles within one cycle \([0, 2\pi]\) are:
\(\theta_1 = 30^\circ = \pi/6\) radians.
\(\theta_2 = 150^\circ = 5\pi/6\) radians.

At \(\theta_1 = \pi/6\), \(\cos(\pi/6) > 0\), so the particle is moving in the positive direction (away from the mean).

At \(\theta_2 = 5\pi/6\), \(\cos(5\pi/6) < 0\), so the particle is moving in the negative direction (towards the mean).

Since they are passing each other in opposite directions, one particle must be at phase \(\pi/6\) and the other at phase \(5\pi/6\).

The phase difference \(\Delta\phi\) is:
\[ \Delta\phi = \theta_2 - \theta_1 = \frac{5\pi}{6} - \frac{\pi}{6} = \frac{4\pi}{6} = \frac{2\pi}{3} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The phase difference between them is \(\frac{2\pi}{3}\).
Quick Tip: Drawing a phasor diagram (reference circle) is a very quick way to solve this. At \(x=A/2\), the phasors are at \(30^\circ\) and \(150^\circ\) from the horizontal axis. The angle between these two phasors is \(150^\circ - 30^\circ = 120^\circ\), which is \(\frac{2\pi}{3}\) radians.


Question 31:

The pitch of whistle of an engine appears to drop by 30% of the original value when it passes a stationary observer. If speed of sound in air is \(350 m/s\), then the speed of engine in \(m/s\) is

  • (A) 87.5
  • (B) 105
  • (C) 150
  • (D) 175
Correct Answer: (C) 150
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Due to the Doppler effect, the frequency of sound heard by a stationary observer from a moving source changes. When the source is receding, the frequency drops. The phrasing "drop by 30% of the original value" implies the receding frequency is 30% less than the true frequency emitted by the source.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Apparent frequency of a receding source:
\[ f' = f \left( \frac{v}{v + v_s} \right) \]

where \(f\) is true frequency, \(v\) is speed of sound, and \(v_s\) is speed of the source.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The pitch drops by 30%, which means the apparent frequency is 70% of the original true frequency \(f\).
\[ f' = f - 0.30f = 0.7f \]

Substitute this into the Doppler equation for a receding source:
\[ 0.7f = f \left( \frac{350}{350 + v_s} \right) \]

Cancel \(f\) from both sides:
\[ 0.7 = \frac{350}{350 + v_s} \]

Multiply both sides by \((350 + v_s)\):
\[ 0.7(350 + v_s) = 350 \]
\[ 245 + 0.7v_s = 350 \]

Isolate the term with \(v_s\):
\[ 0.7v_s = 350 - 245 \]
\[ 0.7v_s = 105 \]

Solve for \(v_s\):
\[ v_s = \frac{105}{0.7} = 150 m/s \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The speed of the engine is \(150 m/s\).
Quick Tip: Pay careful attention to the language. "Drops TO x%" vs "Drops BY x%". "Drops BY 30%" means the new value is \((100 - 30)% = 70%\) of the original.


Question 32:

A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a steady current flows through it. If an iron core is inserted into the solenoid, then the current in the coil

  • (A) will not change.
  • (B) will increase.
  • (C) will decrease.
  • (D) may increase or decrease depending upon the direction of the current.
Correct Answer: (C) will decrease.
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When an iron core is inserted into a solenoid, its magnetic permeability increases drastically, causing a significant increase in the magnetic flux linked with the coil.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

According to Faraday's Law of Electromagnetic Induction, a change in magnetic flux induces an electromotive force (EMF). By Lenz's Law, this induced EMF opposes the change that caused it.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

As the iron core is being inserted, the inductance \(L\) of the solenoid increases, which causes an increase in the magnetic flux (\(\Phi = L \cdot I\)).

This change in flux induces a back EMF in the coil.

According to Lenz's law, this induced back EMF opposes the forward EMF of the battery trying to maintain the current.

Because the effective driving voltage in the circuit is reduced (\(V_{battery} - e_{induced}\)), the net current in the coil decreases momentarily during the process of insertion.

(Note: Once the core is fully inserted and steady state is reached again, the current would return to \(V/R\), but questions framed this way typically ask for the dynamic effect during insertion).


Step 4: Final Answer:

When the core is inserted, the current in the coil will decrease.
Quick Tip: Remember Lenz's law: "Nature abhors a change in flux." Any physical action that increases flux (like inserting a core or moving a magnet closer) generates a response that tries to decrease the current to fight that flux increase.


Question 33:

A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature ' \(T_1\) ' is enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a temperature ' \(T_2\) ' by releasing the piston suddenly. \(L_1\) and \(L_2\) are the lengths of the gas columns before and after the expansion respectively. Then \(\frac{T_1}{T_2}\) is

  • (A) \(\sqrt{\frac{L_1}{L_2}}\)
  • (B) \(\sqrt{\frac{L_2}{L_1}}\)
  • (C) \(\left(\frac{L_1}{L_2}\right)^{2/3}\)
  • (D) \(\left(\frac{L_2}{L_1}\right)^{2/3}\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(\left(\frac{L_2}{L_1}\right)^{2/3}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

For an adiabatic process, the relationship between temperature and volume of an ideal gas is given by \(TV^{\gamma-1} = constant\). The volume of the gas is proportional to the length of the column since the cylinder area is constant.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Adiabatic state equation: \(T_1 V_1^{\gamma-1} = T_2 V_2^{\gamma-1}\).

2. Specific heat ratio for monoatomic gas: \(\gamma = 5/3\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Since the cylinder has a uniform cross-sectional area \(A\), the volume is \(V = A \cdot L\).

Therefore, \(V_1 \propto L_1\) and \(V_2 \propto L_2\).

Using the adiabatic relation:
\[ T_1 V_1^{\gamma-1} = T_2 V_2^{\gamma-1} \]

Rearrange to find the ratio \(T_1 / T_2\):
\[ \frac{T_1}{T_2} = \left( \frac{V_2}{V_1} \right)^{\gamma - 1} \]

Substitute the lengths for the volumes:
\[ \frac{T_1}{T_2} = \left( \frac{L_2}{L_1} \right)^{\gamma - 1} \]

For a monoatomic gas, \(\gamma = \frac{5}{3}\).

Calculate \(\gamma - 1\):
\[ \gamma - 1 = \frac{5}{3} - 1 = \frac{2}{3} \]

Substitute this back into the equation:
\[ \frac{T_1}{T_2} = \left( \frac{L_2}{L_1} \right)^{2/3} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio \(\frac{T_1}{T_2}\) is \(\left(\frac{L_2}{L_1}\right)^{2/3}\).
Quick Tip: Learn the \(\gamma\) values for common gases: Monoatomic (\(5/3 \approx 1.67\)), Diatomic (\(7/5 = 1.4\)), Polyatomic (\(4/3 \approx 1.33\)). Adiabatic expansion always leads to cooling, so if \(V_2 > V_1\), then \(T_2 < T_1\).


Question 34:

In the diagram, the total electric flux through the closed surface ' S ' is


[Given q = charge

\(\varepsilon_0 = permittivity of free space\)]

  • (A) \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_0}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{-2q}{\varepsilon_0}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{-q}{\varepsilon_0}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{3q}{\varepsilon_0}\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_0}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Gauss's Law in electrostatics, the total electric flux passing through a closed hypothetical surface (Gaussian surface) depends solely on the net charge strictly enclosed within that surface.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Gauss's Law: \(\Phi_E = \frac{q_{enclosed}}{\varepsilon_0}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Looking closely at the provided diagram, the closed surface 'S' (represented by the blue line) outlines a specific region.

- The charge marked as \(\cdot q\) lies completely inside the boundary of the closed surface 'S'.

- The charge marked as \(\cdot -2q\) lies to the left of the leftward-curving boundary, completely outside the closed surface 'S'.

Therefore, the net enclosed charge \(q_{enclosed}\) is only \(+q\).

Using Gauss's Law:
\[ Total Flux \Phi_E = \frac{q_{enclosed}}{\varepsilon_0} = \frac{q}{\varepsilon_0} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The total electric flux is \(\frac{q}{\varepsilon_0}\).
Quick Tip: Charges completely outside a closed Gaussian surface do not contribute to the net electric flux through that surface. Their field lines enter and leave the surface, canceling out perfectly.


Question 35:

If an electron in hydrogen atom jumps from \(3^{rd}\) orbit to \(2^{nd}\) orbit it emits a photon of wavelength '\(\lambda\)'. When it emits a photon from \(4^{th}\) orbit to \(3^{rd}\) orbit then the corresponding wavelength of emitted photon will be

  • (A) \(\frac{16}{25}\lambda\)
  • (B) \(\frac{9}{16}\lambda\)
  • (C) \(\frac{20}{7}\lambda\)
  • (D) \(\frac{20}{13}\lambda\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\frac{20}{7}\lambda\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The wavelength of a photon emitted during an electron transition between two energy levels in a hydrogen atom is given by the Rydberg formula.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Rydberg formula: \(\frac{1}{\lambda} = R \left( \frac{1}{n_f^2} - \frac{1}{n_i^2} \right)\), where \(R\) is the Rydberg constant.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For the first transition from \(n_i = 3\) to \(n_f = 2\) with wavelength \(\lambda\):
\[ \frac{1}{\lambda} = R \left( \frac{1}{2^2} - \frac{1}{3^2} \right) = R \left( \frac{1}{4} - \frac{1}{9} \right) \]
\[ \frac{1}{\lambda} = R \left( \frac{9 - 4}{36} \right) = R \left( \frac{5}{36} \right) \implies R = \frac{36}{5\lambda} \quad --- (Eq. 1) \]

For the second transition from \(n_i = 4\) to \(n_f = 3\) with wavelength \(\lambda'\):
\[ \frac{1}{\lambda'} = R \left( \frac{1}{3^2} - \frac{1}{4^2} \right) = R \left( \frac{1}{9} - \frac{1}{16} \right) \]
\[ \frac{1}{\lambda'} = R \left( \frac{16 - 9}{144} \right) = R \left( \frac{7}{144} \right) \]

Substitute \(R\) from Eq. 1:
\[ \frac{1}{\lambda'} = \left( \frac{36}{5\lambda} \right) \cdot \left( \frac{7}{144} \right) \]

Notice that \(144 = 36 \times 4\), so:
\[ \frac{1}{\lambda'} = \frac{1}{5\lambda} \cdot \frac{7}{4} = \frac{7}{20\lambda} \]

Invert both sides to find \(\lambda'\):
\[ \lambda' = \frac{20}{7}\lambda \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The corresponding wavelength will be \(\frac{20}{7}\lambda\).
Quick Tip: Transitions between higher orbits (e.g., \(4 \to 3\)) have a smaller energy difference than transitions between lower orbits (e.g., \(3 \to 2\)). Since \(E = hc/\lambda\), a smaller energy difference means a longer wavelength. Therefore, \(\lambda'\) must be greater than \(\lambda\), which eliminates options A and B immediately.


Question 36:

A solenoid having \(400 turns/metre\) has a core of a material with relative permeability \(300\). If a current of \(0.5 A\) is passed through it, then the magnetisation of the core material is nearly

  • (A) \(6 \times 10^2 A/m\)
  • (B) \(6 \times 10^3 A/m\)
  • (C) \(6 \times 10^4 A/m\)
  • (D) \(6 \times 10^5 A/m\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(6 \times 10^4\text{ A/m}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Magnetisation (\(M\)) is the magnetic moment per unit volume. It is related to the applied magnetic intensity (\(H\)) by the magnetic susceptibility (\(\chi\)).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Magnetic Intensity in a solenoid: \(H = n \cdot I\).

2. Relation between relative permeability and susceptibility: \(\mu_r = 1 + \chi \implies \chi = \mu_r - 1\).

3. Magnetisation: \(M = \chi \cdot H\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given values:
\(n = 400 turns/m\)
\(I = 0.5 A\)
\(\mu_r = 300\)

First, calculate the magnetic intensity \(H\):
\[ H = n \cdot I = 400 \times 0.5 = 200 A/m \]

Next, find the magnetic susceptibility \(\chi\):
\[ \chi = \mu_r - 1 = 300 - 1 = 299 \]

Now, calculate the magnetisation \(M\):
\[ M = \chi \cdot H = 299 \times 200 \]
\[ M = 59800 A/m \]

Approximating to match the given scientific notation options:
\[ M \approx 60000 A/m = 6 \times 10^4 A/m \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The magnetisation of the core material is nearly \(6 \times 10^4 A/m\).
Quick Tip: For large values of \(\mu_r\), the approximation \(\chi \approx \mu_r\) is often used to save time. Using \(300 \times 200 = 60000\) gets you directly to the correct multiple-choice option without subtracting 1.


Question 37:

The volume of a block of metal at \(30^\circC\) changes by \(0.12%\) when its temperature is increased to \(70^\circC\). The coefficient of linear expansion of the metal is

  • (A) \(2 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC\)
  • (B) \(3 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC\)
  • (C) \(4 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC\)
  • (D) \(1 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(1 \times 10^{-5} /^\circ\text{C}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When an object is heated, its volume expands. The fractional change in volume is proportional to the change in temperature and the coefficient of volume expansion (\(\gamma\)). The coefficient of linear expansion (\(\alpha\)) is directly related to \(\gamma\).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Volume expansion: \(\frac{\Delta V}{V} = \gamma \cdot \Delta T\).

2. Relation between coefficients: \(\gamma = 3\alpha\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given values:

Percentage change in volume \(\frac{\Delta V}{V} = 0.12% = \frac{0.12}{100} = 0.0012\)

Change in temperature \(\Delta T = 70^\circC - 30^\circC = 40^\circC\)

First, find the coefficient of volume expansion (\(\gamma\)):
\[ \gamma = \frac{\Delta V / V}{\Delta T} = \frac{0.0012}{40} \]
\[ \gamma = 0.00003 /^\circC = 3 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC \]

Now, calculate the coefficient of linear expansion (\(\alpha\)):
\[ \alpha = \frac{\gamma}{3} = \frac{3 \times 10^{-5}}{3} \]
\[ \alpha = 1 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The coefficient of linear expansion is \(1 \times 10^{-5} /^\circC\).
Quick Tip: A common trap is to calculate \(\gamma\) and select that as the answer (Option B). Always read the final line of the question carefully to see which specific coefficient (linear, superficial, or volume) is requested.


Question 38:

A galvanometer of resistance ' \(G\) ' can be converted into a voltmeter of range \( (0 - V) \) volt by connecting a resistance ' \(R\) ' in series with it. The resistance ' \(R\) ' required to change its range from \( \left(0 - \frac{V}{4}\right) \) volt will be

  • (A) \(\frac{R-G}{2}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{R-2G}{3}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{R-3G}{4}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{4R-3G}{5}\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\frac{R-3G}{4}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

A galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by adding a high resistance in series. The maximum voltage it can measure is \(V = I_g(G + R)\), where \(I_g\) is the full-scale deflection current.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Voltmeter equation: \(V = I_g (G + R_{series})\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

For the first case, the range is \(V\) and the series resistance is \(R\):
\[ V = I_g(G + R) \implies I_g = \frac{V}{G + R} \quad --- (Eq. 1) \]

For the second case, let the new series resistance be \(R'\) for a new range of \(V' = \frac{V}{4}\):
\[ \frac{V}{4} = I_g(G + R') \implies I_g = \frac{V/4}{G + R'} = \frac{V}{4(G + R')} \quad --- (Eq. 2) \]

Since \(I_g\) is a fixed property of the given galvanometer, equate Eq. 1 and Eq. 2:
\[ \frac{V}{G + R} = \frac{V}{4(G + R')} \]

Cancel \(V\) and cross-multiply:
\[ 4(G + R') = G + R \]
\[ 4G + 4R' = G + R \]

Isolate \(R'\):
\[ 4R' = R + G - 4G \]
\[ 4R' = R - 3G \]
\[ R' = \frac{R - 3G}{4} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The required resistance is \(\frac{R-3G}{4}\).
Quick Tip: Whenever comparing two setups for the same galvanometer, write the voltage equations and divide them. \(V_1 / V_2 = (G + R_1) / (G + R_2)\). This immediately sets up a clean algebraic relation.


Question 39:

A light metal disc of radius ' \(r\) ' floats on water surface and bends the surface downwards along the perimeter making an angle ' \(\theta\) ' with the vertical edge of the disc. If the weight of water displaced by the disc is ' W ', the weight of the metal disc is [ \(T\) = surface tension of water]

  • (A) \(W - 2\pirT \cos \theta\)
  • (B) \(2\pi r T + W\)
  • (C) \(2\pirT \cos \theta + W\)
  • (D) \(2\pirT \cos \theta - W\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(2\pi\text{rT} \cos \theta + \text{W}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When an object floats, the total downward force (its weight) must be balanced by the total upward force. Here, the upward forces include the buoyant force and the vertical component of the surface tension force.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Archimedes' Principle: Buoyant force \(F_b = Weight of displaced liquid = W\).

2. Surface Tension Force: \(F_s = T \times Length of contact boundary = T \times 2\pi r\).

3. Equilibrium: \(Weight = F_b + Upward component of F_s\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The water surface bends downwards, meaning it "pulls" the disc upwards due to surface tension trying to minimize surface area.

The angle of contact \(\theta\) is with the vertical edge of the disc.

The force of surface tension acts along the tangent to the liquid surface.

The total magnitude of the surface tension force around the perimeter is \(T \times (2\pi r)\).

Since the surface makes an angle \(\theta\) with the vertical, the upward vertical component of this force is \((T \times 2\pi r) \cos \theta\).

Total upward force supporting the disc = Buoyant force (\(W\)) + Upward surface tension force.

For the disc to float in equilibrium, its weight (\(W_{disc}\)) must equal the total upward force:
\[ W_{disc} = W + 2\pi r T \cos \theta \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The weight of the metal disc is \(2\pi r T \cos \theta + W\).
Quick Tip: Pay close attention to the wording "bends the surface downwards". This means the liquid meniscus is depressed, resulting in an upward pull on the object by the liquid membrane.


Question 40:

The magnetic field at the centre of a current carrying circular coil of area ' \(A\) ' is ' \(B\) '. The magnetic moment of the coil is ( \(\mu_0\) = permeability of free space)

  • (A) \(\frac{2B}{\mu_0} \sqrt{\frac{A^3}{\pi}}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{BA^2}{4\mu_0\pi}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{2\pi}{\mu_0} \sqrt{A^3}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{\mu_0}{2B} \sqrt{\frac{A^3}{\pi}}\)
Correct Answer: (A) \(\frac{2B}{\mu_0} \sqrt{\frac{A^3}{\pi}}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The magnetic field at the center of a coil depends on the current and its radius. The magnetic moment of the coil depends on the current and its area. We can link the two by solving for the current.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Magnetic field at centre: \(B = \frac{\mu_0 I}{2R}\).

2. Area of coil: \(A = \pi R^2 \implies R = \sqrt{\frac{A}{\pi}}\).

3. Magnetic moment (for \(N=1\)): \(M = I \cdot A\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

First, express the current \(I\) in terms of \(B\) and \(R\):
\[ I = \frac{2 B R}{\mu_0} \]

Substitute \(R = \sqrt{\frac{A}{\pi}}\) into the current equation:
\[ I = \frac{2 B}{\mu_0} \sqrt{\frac{A}{\pi}} \]

Now, substitute this expression for \(I\) into the magnetic moment formula:
\[ M = I \cdot A = \left( \frac{2 B}{\mu_0} \sqrt{\frac{A}{\pi}} \right) \cdot A \]

Combine the \(A\) terms (\(A \cdot A^{1/2} = A^{3/2}\)):
\[ M = \frac{2 B}{\mu_0} \frac{A \sqrt{A}}{\sqrt{\pi}} = \frac{2 B}{\mu_0} \sqrt{\frac{A^3}{\pi}} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The magnetic moment of the coil is \(\frac{2B}{\mu_0} \sqrt{\frac{A^3}{\pi}}\).
Quick Tip: Whenever a problem asks to relate two quantities that both depend on radius and current, express the unknown parameter (here, current) in terms of the given parameters (\(B\) and \(A\)) and substitute it directly.


Question 41:

A parallel combination of two capacitors of capacities ' \(C\) ' and ' \(\frac{C}{3}\) ' respectively is connected across a battery of 12 volt. When both capacitors are fully charged, the charge and energy stored in them is \(Q_1, Q_2\) and \(E_1, E_2\) respectively. Then the ratio of \((E_1 - E_2)\) to \((Q_1 - Q_2)\) is

  • (A) 1 : 8
  • (B) 1 : 6
  • (C) 8 : 1
  • (D) 6 : 1
Correct Answer: (D) 6 : 1
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When capacitors are in parallel, the voltage across them is the same. The charge and energy stored in each can be calculated directly using their respective capacitances and the common voltage.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Charge: \(Q = CV\).

2. Energy: \(E = \frac{1}{2}CV^2\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Given: \(C_1 = C\), \(C_2 = C/3\), and \(V = 12 V\).

Calculate charges:
\[ Q_1 = C_1 V = C(12) = 12C \]
\[ Q_2 = C_2 V = \left(\frac{C}{3}\right)(12) = 4C \]

Calculate energy stored:
\[ E_1 = \frac{1}{2}C_1 V^2 = \frac{1}{2}C(12)^2 = \frac{1}{2}C(144) = 72C \]
\[ E_2 = \frac{1}{2}C_2 V^2 = \frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{C}{3}\right)(12)^2 = \frac{1}{6}C(144) = 24C \]

Find the differences:
\[ E_1 - E_2 = 72C - 24C = 48C \]
\[ Q_1 - Q_2 = 12C - 4C = 8C \]

Calculate the required ratio:
\[ \frac{E_1 - E_2}{Q_1 - Q_2} = \frac{48C}{8C} = 6 \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio is 6 : 1.
Quick Tip: A faster way: \(\frac{E_1 - E_2}{Q_1 - Q_2} = \frac{\frac{1}{2}C_1 V^2 - \frac{1}{2}C_2 V^2}{C_1 V - C_2 V} = \frac{\frac{1}{2}V^2(C_1 - C_2)}{V(C_1 - C_2)} = \frac{1}{2}V\). Given \(V=12\), the ratio is \(\frac{12}{2} = 6\). You don't even need to use the actual values of capacitance!


Question 42:

A transparent sphere of refractive index ' \(\mu\) ' and radius of curvature ' \(R\) ' is kept in air. A point object is placed at a distance ' \(d\) ' from the surface of the sphere so that the real image is formed at the same distance ' \(d\) ' from exactly opposite side of the sphere. The distance ' \(d\) ' is

  • (A) \(\frac{\mu}{R}\)
  • (B) \(R(\mu - 1)\)
  • (C) \(\frac{R}{(\mu - 1)}\)
  • (D) \(\frac{R}{(\mu + 1)}\)
Correct Answer: (C) \(\frac{R}{(\mu - 1)}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Refraction occurs at two spherical surfaces. Because the object and image are symmetrically placed at distance \(d\) on either side, the light rays inside the sphere must travel parallel to the principal axis.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Formula for refraction at a single spherical surface:
\[ \frac{n_2}{v} - \frac{n_1}{u} = \frac{n_2 - n_1}{R_{surface}} \]


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's consider the refraction at the first surface (air to medium).

Because of the symmetry of the problem, the first surface must refract the diverging rays from the object such that they become parallel inside the sphere. Thus, the image formed by the first surface is at infinity.

For the first surface:

Object distance \(u = -d\).

Image distance \(v = \infty\) (inside the sphere).

Refractive indices: \(n_1 = 1\) (air), \(n_2 = \mu\) (sphere).

Radius of curvature \(R_{surface} = +R\).

Apply the refraction formula:
\[ \frac{\mu}{\infty} - \frac{1}{-d} = \frac{\mu - 1}{R} \]

Since \(\frac{\mu}{\infty} = 0\):
\[ 0 + \frac{1}{d} = \frac{\mu - 1}{R} \]

Inverting both sides to solve for \(d\):
\[ d = \frac{R}{\mu - 1} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The distance is \(\frac{R}{(\mu - 1)}\).
Quick Tip: Symmetry problems often simplify greatly. If object and image distances are equal for a symmetric lens or sphere, the rays must be collimated (parallel) inside the middle of the system. This allows you to solve the problem by only considering the first half.


Question 43:

The instantaneous value of current in an a.c. circuit is \(I = 2 \sin \left[ 100\pi t + \frac{\pi}{3} \right]\) A. The current will be maximum for the first time at \((\sin 90^\circ = 1)\)

  • (A) \(\frac{1}{100} s\)
  • (B) \(\frac{1}{200} s\)
  • (C) \(\frac{1}{400} s\)
  • (D) \(\frac{1}{600} s\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(\frac{1}{600}\text{ s}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The current given by a sine function reaches its first positive maximum when the phase angle inside the sine function equals \(\pi/2\) radians (\(90^\circ\)).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Set the phase angle to \(\pi/2\):
\[ \omega t + \phi = \frac{\pi}{2} \]


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

The given current equation is \(I = 2 \sin \left( 100\pi t + \frac{\pi}{3} \right)\).

For the current \(I\) to be maximum, the value of the sine term must be 1.
\[ \sin \left( 100\pi t + \frac{\pi}{3} \right) = 1 \]

The sine function is 1 for the first time when its argument is \(\frac{\pi}{2}\).
\[ 100\pi t + \frac{\pi}{3} = \frac{\pi}{2} \]

Subtract \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) from both sides:
\[ 100\pi t = \frac{\pi}{2} - \frac{\pi}{3} \]

Find a common denominator (6) to subtract the fractions:
\[ 100\pi t = \frac{3\pi}{6} - \frac{2\pi}{6} = \frac{\pi}{6} \]

Divide both sides by \(100\pi\):
\[ t = \frac{\pi}{6 \times 100\pi} = \frac{1}{600} s \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The current will be maximum for the first time at \(\frac{1}{600} s\).
Quick Tip: To ensure it is the first time, check that \(t\) is positive. If solving gave a negative \(t\), you would need to add \(2\pi\) to the right side (e.g., \(5\pi/2\)) and solve again to find the first physical occurrence \(t > 0\). Here, \(t\) was positive, so it's correct.


Question 44:

A fixed mass of gas at constant pressure occupies a volume ' \(V\) '. The gas undergoes a rise in temperature so that the r.m.s. velocity of the molecule is doubled. The new volume will be

  • (A) \(\frac{V}{2}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{V}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  • (C) \(2 V\)
  • (D) \(4 V\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(4 V\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

According to Kinetic Theory, the RMS velocity of gas molecules is directly proportional to the square root of the absolute temperature. For an isobaric (constant pressure) process, volume is directly proportional to temperature (Charles's Law).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. RMS velocity: \(V_{rms} \propto \sqrt{T} \implies T \propto V_{rms}^2\).

2. Charles's Law (constant P): \(V \propto T\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the initial state be \(T_1, V_1, V_{rms,1}\) and the final state be \(T_2, V_2, V_{rms,2}\).

Given that the new RMS velocity is doubled:
\[ V_{rms,2} = 2 \cdot V_{rms,1} \]

Since \(T \propto V_{rms}^2\), the ratio of temperatures is:
\[ \frac{T_2}{T_1} = \left( \frac{V_{rms,2}}{V_{rms,1}} \right)^2 = (2)^2 = 4 \]

Therefore, the new absolute temperature is four times the original temperature (\(T_2 = 4T_1\)).

According to Charles's Law, at constant pressure, volume is directly proportional to temperature (\(V \propto T\)).
\[ \frac{V_2}{V_1} = \frac{T_2}{T_1} = 4 \]
\[ V_2 = 4V_1 = 4V \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The new volume will be \(4 V\).
Quick Tip: Always link macroscopic parameters (like Volume) to microscopic ones (like RMS velocity) through Temperature. \(v_{rms} \propto \sqrt{T}\) and \(V \propto T\) combines to \(V \propto v_{rms}^2\).


Question 45:

The Boolean expression for \(X - OR\) gate \(C = (A \oplus B)\) is equivalent to

  • (A) \((\overline{A} \cdot B) + (A \cdot \overline{B})\)
  • (B) \(A + (\overline{A} \cdot \overline{B})\)
  • (C) \((A \cdot B) + \overline{B}\)
  • (D) \((A \cdot B) + (\overline{A} \cdot \overline{B})\)
Correct Answer: (A) \((\overline{\text{A}} \cdot \text{B}) + (\text{A} \cdot \overline{\text{B}})\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

An Exclusive-OR (XOR) gate outputs TRUE (1) only when its two inputs are different (one is 1, the other is 0).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

The truth table for XOR is:

A=0, B=0 \(\implies\) Output=0

A=0, B=1 \(\implies\) Output=1

A=1, B=0 \(\implies\) Output=1

A=1, B=1 \(\implies\) Output=0

We derive the Sum of Products (SOP) expression from the rows where the output is 1.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

From the truth table:

Row 2: \(A=0, B=1\) gives Output 1. The product term for this is \(\overline{A} \cdot B\).

Row 3: \(A=1, B=0\) gives Output 1. The product term for this is \(A \cdot \overline{B}\).

Summing these products gives the Boolean expression for the XOR operation:
\[ Y = \overline{A}B + A\overline{B} \]

This matches Option A precisely: \((\overline{A} \cdot B) + (A \cdot \overline{B})\).

Note: Option D represents the XNOR gate (equivalence gate), which is the inverse of XOR.


Step 4: Final Answer:

The Boolean expression is equivalent to \((\overline{A} \cdot B) + (A \cdot \overline{B})\).
Quick Tip: XOR is essentially an "inequality" detector. Its algebraic form is always \(A'B + AB'\). XNOR is an "equality" detector, represented by \(AB + A'B'\).


Question 46:

The equation of simple harmonic progressive wave is given by \(y = A \sin(100\pi t - 4x)\). The distance between two particles having a phase difference of \((\frac{\pi}{4})^c\) is

  • (A) \(\frac{\pi}{18} m\)
  • (B) \(\frac{\pi}{16} m\)
  • (C) \(\frac{\pi}{9} m\)
  • (D) \(\frac{\pi}{3} m\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\frac{\pi}{16}\text{ m}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

In a progressive wave, the phase of a particle depends on both time \(t\) and position \(x\). At a given instant in time, the phase difference between two particles is purely due to their difference in position (\(\Delta x\)).


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. General wave equation: \(y = A \sin(\omega t - kx)\).

2. Phase difference relation: \(\Delta\phi = k \cdot \Delta x = \frac{2\pi}{\lambda} \Delta x\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Compare the given equation \(y = A \sin(100\pi t - 4x)\) with the standard form.

We identify the angular wave number \(k\):
\[ k = 4 rad/m \]

The relation between phase difference \(\Delta\phi\) and path difference \(\Delta x\) is:
\[ \Delta\phi = k \cdot \Delta x \]

Given phase difference \(\Delta\phi = \frac{\pi}{4}\) radians.

Substitute the values into the relation:
\[ \frac{\pi}{4} = 4 \cdot \Delta x \]

Solve for the distance \(\Delta x\):
\[ \Delta x = \frac{\pi}{4 \times 4} = \frac{\pi}{16} m \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The distance between the two particles is \(\frac{\pi}{16} m\).
Quick Tip: The argument of the sine function is the phase. To find the phase difference for a fixed \(t\), simply take the difference of the \(kx\) terms: \(|(-kx_1) - (-kx_2)| = k\Delta x\). So \(\Delta\phi = k\Delta x\) applies directly.


Question 47:

A photon and an electron have an equal energy ' \(E\) '. The ratio of wavelength ' \(\lambda_p\) ' of photon to that of electron ' \(\lambda_e\) ' is proportional to

  • (A) \(\sqrt{E}\)
  • (B) \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{E}}\)
  • (C) \(\frac{1}{E}\)
  • (D) \(E\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\text{E}}}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The wavelength of a photon is related to its energy by the Planck-Einstein relation. The de Broglie wavelength of an electron is related to its kinetic energy.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Wavelength of a photon: \(E = \frac{hc}{\lambda_p} \implies \lambda_p = \frac{hc}{E}\).

2. de Broglie wavelength of an electron: \(\lambda_e = \frac{h}{p}\).

3. Relation between momentum and kinetic energy for a particle: \(p = \sqrt{2mE} \implies \lambda_e = \frac{h}{\sqrt{2mE}}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let's formulate the ratio \(\frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e}\):
\[ \frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e} = \frac{hc / E}{h / \sqrt{2mE}} \]

Multiply by the reciprocal of the denominator:
\[ \frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e} = \left(\frac{hc}{E}\right) \cdot \left(\frac{\sqrt{2mE}}{h}\right) \]

Cancel Planck's constant \(h\):
\[ \frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e} = c \cdot \frac{\sqrt{2mE}}{E} \]

Simplify the energy term \(\frac{\sqrt{E}}{E} = \frac{1}{\sqrt{E}}\):
\[ \frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e} = c \sqrt{2m} \cdot \frac{1}{\sqrt{E}} \]

Since \(c\) and \(m\) are constants, the ratio is proportional to:
\[ \frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e} \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{E}} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The ratio is proportional to \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{E}}\).
Quick Tip: Remember the scaling differences: Photon wavelength is inversely proportional to \(E\), while particle wavelength is inversely proportional to \(\sqrt{E}\). Their ratio (\(E^{-1} / E^{-0.5}\)) inherently leaves a factor of \(E^{-0.5}\).


Question 48:

The height at which the acceleration due to gravity becomes \(\frac{g}{4}\) in terms of \(R\) is [ \(R = the radius of the earth\) ]

  • (A) \(\frac{R}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  • (B) \(R\)
  • (C) \(\sqrt{2}R\)
  • (D) \(2R\)
Correct Answer: (B) \(\text{R}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

The acceleration due to gravity decreases as you move further away from the surface of the Earth. The formula relates gravity at an altitude \(h\) to gravity at the surface.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

Gravity at height \(h\): \(g_h = \frac{g}{\left(1 + \frac{h}{R}\right)^2}\), where \(g\) is the gravity at the surface and \(R\) is Earth's radius.


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

We are given that the gravity at height \(h\) is \(g_h = \frac{g}{4}\).

Substitute this into the formula:
\[ \frac{g}{4} = \frac{g}{\left(1 + \frac{h}{R}\right)^2} \]

Divide both sides by \(g\):
\[ \frac{1}{4} = \frac{1}{\left(1 + \frac{h}{R}\right)^2} \]

Invert both fractions:
\[ 4 = \left(1 + \frac{h}{R}\right)^2 \]

Take the square root of both sides (considering only the positive physical root):
\[ 2 = 1 + \frac{h}{R} \]

Subtract 1 from both sides:
\[ 1 = \frac{h}{R} \]

Multiply by \(R\):
\[ h = R \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The height is \(R\).
Quick Tip: Avoid the approximation formula \(g_h = g(1 - 2h/R)\) unless \(h\) is explicitly given as very small (\(h \ll R\)). Since the result is \(h=R\), using the approximation would have given an incorrect and unphysical result.


Question 49:

In a biprism experiment, fifth dark fringe is obtained at a point. A thin transparent film of refractive index '\(\mu\)' is placed in one of the interfering paths. Now \(7^{th}\) bright fringe is obtained at the same point. If '\(\lambda\)' is the wavelength of light used, the thickness of film is equal to

  • (A) \(1.5(\mu - 1)\lambda\)
  • (B) \(\frac{1.5\lambda}{(\mu - 1)}\)
  • (C) \(2.5(\mu - 1)\lambda\)
  • (D) \(\frac{2.5\lambda}{(\mu - 1)}\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(\frac{2.5\lambda}{(\mu - 1)}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

Introducing a thin transparent film into one of the interfering paths in an interference experiment introduces an additional path difference. This causes the entire fringe pattern to shift.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Path difference for \(n\)-th dark fringe: \(\Delta x_{dark} = \left(n - \frac{1}{2}\right)\lambda\).

2. Path difference for \(m\)-th bright fringe: \(\Delta x_{bright} = m\lambda\).

3. Additional path difference introduced by film of thickness \(t\): \(\Delta x_{film} = (\mu - 1)t\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Let the point on the screen be \(P\).

Initially, the 5th dark fringe is at \(P\) (\(n=5\)). The optical path difference at \(P\) is:
\[ \Delta x_1 = \left(5 - \frac{1}{2}\right)\lambda = 4.5\lambda \]

When the film is inserted, the pattern shifts such that the 7th bright fringe now falls on point \(P\). The required effective path difference for a 7th bright fringe is:
\[ \Delta x_2 = 7\lambda \]

The change in the path difference at point \(P\) is entirely due to the introduction of the film.
\[ Change in path difference = \Delta x_2 - \Delta x_1 = 7\lambda - 4.5\lambda = 2.5\lambda \]

This change is equal to the optical path difference introduced by the film:
\[ (\mu - 1)t = 2.5\lambda \]

Rearrange to solve for the thickness \(t\):
\[ t = \frac{2.5\lambda}{(\mu - 1)} \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The thickness of the film is equal to \(\frac{2.5\lambda}{(\mu - 1)}\).
Quick Tip: Standardize your dark fringe formula. Using \((n-1/2)\lambda\) means the 1st dark fringe corresponds to \(n=1\). If you use \((n+1/2)\lambda\), the 1st dark fringe corresponds to \(n=0\). Always ensure your index matches the wording.


Question 50:

Figure shows a rectangular frame situated in a constant magnetic field. A wire BC of length \(1 m\) is moved out with velocity \(4 m/s\). Magnetic field strength is \(0.15 T\). Force acting on the wire \(BC\) is


  • (A) \(18 N\)
  • (B) \(1.8 N\)
  • (C) \(0.18 N\)
  • (D) \(0.018 N\)
Correct Answer: (D) \(0.018\text{ N}\)
View Solution




Step 1: Understanding the Concept:

When a conducting wire moves perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field, a motional electromotive force (EMF) is induced. This EMF drives a current through the closed circuit, and the magnetic field then exerts an opposing Lorentz force on this current-carrying wire.


Step 2: Key Formula or Approach:

1. Motional EMF: \(e = B l v\).

2. Induced Current (Ohm's Law): \(I = \frac{e}{R}\).

3. Magnetic force on the wire: \(F = B I l\).

Combining these gives the direct formula for force: \(F = \frac{B^2 l^2 v}{R}\).


Step 3: Detailed Explanation:

Identify the given values from the text and figure:

Magnetic field \(B = 0.15 T\)

Length of moving wire \(l = 1 m\)

Velocity \(v = 4 m/s\)

Resistance \(R = 5\Omega\)

Calculate the induced motional EMF:
\[ e = B l v = 0.15 \times 1 \times 4 = 0.6 V \]

Calculate the induced current in the circuit:
\[ I = \frac{e}{R} = \frac{0.6}{5} = 0.12 A \]

Calculate the magnetic force acting on the wire:
\[ F = B I l = 0.15 \times 0.12 \times 1 \]
\[ F = 0.018 N \]


Step 4: Final Answer:

The force acting on the wire \(BC\) is \(0.018 N\).
Quick Tip: To save time during exams, directly memorize the combined formula for the force required to pull a loop through a magnetic field at constant speed: \(F = \frac{B^2 l^2 v}{R}\).

Previous Year MHT CET Question Papers

*The article might have information for the previous academic years, please refer the official website of the exam.

Ask your question

Subscribe To Our News Letter

Get Latest Notification Of Colleges, Exams and News

© 2026 Patronum Web Private Limited